1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2021-04-25.21} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\currentchapterdefs{} 298\def\currentsectiondefs{} 299\def\currentsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\currentcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\newtoks\defaultoutput 313\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 314\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 315 316\newbox\headlinebox 317\newbox\footlinebox 318 319% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 320% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 321% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 322% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 323% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 324% \shipout a page. 325% 326% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 327% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 328% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 329% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 330% 331\newtoks\savedtopmark 332\newif\iftopmarksaved 333\topmarksavedtrue 334\def\savetopmark{% 335 \iftopmarksaved\else 336 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 337 \global\topmarksavedtrue 338 \fi 339} 340 341% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 342% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 343% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 344% to the auxiliary files. 345% 346\def\onepageout#1{% 347 \hoffset=\normaloffset 348 % 349 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 350 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 351 % 352 \checkchapterpage 353 % 354 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 355 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 356 % values in \headline and \footline. 357 % 358 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 359 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 360 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 361 \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 362 % 363 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 364 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 365 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 366 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}% 367 % 368 {% 369 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 370 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 371 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 372 % before the \shipout runs. 373 % 374 \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 375 \turnoffactive 376 \shipout\vbox{% 377 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 378 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 379 % 380 \unvbox\headlinebox 381 \pagebody{#1}% 382 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 383 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 384 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 385 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 386 \vskip 24pt 387 \unvbox\footlinebox 388 \fi 389 % 390 }% 391 }% 392 \global\topmarksavedfalse 393 \advancepageno 394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 395} 396 397\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 398 399% Main part of page, including any footnotes 400\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 401{\catcode`\@ =11 402\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 403% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 404\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 405 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 406\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 407\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 408\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 409} 410 411% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings. 412\newif\ifchapterpage 413\def\checkchapterpage{% 414 % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page 415 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 416 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 417 % 418 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 419 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 420 % 421 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 422 \chapterpagefalse 423 \else 424 \chapterpagetrue 425 \fi 426} 427 428% Argument parsing 429 430% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 431% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 432% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 433% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 434% 435\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 436\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 437 \def\argtorun{#2}% 438 \begingroup 439 \obeylines 440 \spaceisspace 441 #1% 442 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 443} 444 445{\obeylines % 446 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 447 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 448 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 449 }% 450} 451 452% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to 453% \argcheckspaces. 454\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 455\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 456 457% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 458% 459% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 460% @end itemize @c foo 461% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 462% by \finishparsearg. 463% 464\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 465\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 466\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 467 \def\temp{#3}% 468 \ifx\temp\empty 469 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 470 \let\temp\finishparsearg 471 \else 472 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 473 \fi 474 % Put the space token in: 475 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 476} 477 478% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 479% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 480% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 481% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 482% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 483% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 484% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 485% 486% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 487% 488\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 489 490 491% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 492% 493% \parseargdef\foo{...} 494% is roughly equivalent to 495% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 496% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 497\def\parseargdef#1{% 498 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 499} 500\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 501 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 502 \def#1##1% 503} 504 505% Several utility definitions with active space: 506{ 507 \obeyspaces 508 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 509 510 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 511 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 512 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 513 % should produce a line of output anyway. 514 % 515 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 516 517 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 518 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 519 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 520 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 521} 522 523 524\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 525 526% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 527% 528% \envdef\foo{...} 529% \def\Efoo{...} 530% 531% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 532% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 533% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 534% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 535% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 536% 537% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 538% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 539% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 540% special case.) 541 542 543% At run-time, environments start with this: 544\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 545% initialize 546\let\thisenv\empty 547 548% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 549\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 550\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 551 552% Check whether we're in the right environment: 553\def\checkenv#1{% 554 \def\temp{#1}% 555 \ifx\thisenv\temp 556 \else 557 \badenverr 558 \fi 559} 560 561% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 562\def\badenverr{% 563 \errhelp = \EMsimple 564 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 565 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 566} 567\def\inenvironment#1{% 568 \ifx#1\empty 569 outside of any environment% 570 \else 571 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 572 \fi 573} 574 575 576% @end foo calls \checkenv and executes the definition of \Efoo. 577\parseargdef\end{% 578 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 579 \else 580 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 581 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 582 \csname E#1\endcsname 583 \endgroup 584 \fi 585} 586 587\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 588 589 590% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 591% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 592% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 593% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 594% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 595{\catcode`@ = 11 596 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 597 % if the definition is written into an index file. 598 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 599 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 600} 601 602% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 603\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 604 605% @* forces a line break. 606\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 607 608% @/ allows a line break. 609\let\/=\allowbreak 610 611% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 612\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 613 614% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 615\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 616 617% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 618\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 619 620% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 621% 622\def\onword{on} 623\def\offword{off} 624% 625\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 626 \def\temp{#1}% 627 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 628 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 629 \else 630 \errhelp = \EMsimple 631 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 632 \fi\fi 633} 634 635% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 636% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 637% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 638\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 639 640% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 641% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 642% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 643% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 644% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 645% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 646% the text is small, which looks bad. 647% 648% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 649% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 650% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 651% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 652% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 653% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 654% 655\newbox\groupbox 656\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 657% 658\envdef\group{% 659 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 660 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 661 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 662 \fi 663 \startsavinginserts 664 % 665 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 666 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 667 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 668 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 669 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 670 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 671 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 672 \comment 673} 674% 675% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 676% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 677% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 678% above. But it's pretty close. 679\def\Egroup{% 680 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 681 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 682 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 683 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 684 \egroup % End the \vtop. 685 \addgroupbox 686 \prevdepth = \dimen1 687 \checkinserts 688} 689 690\def\addgroupbox{ 691 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 692 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 693 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 694 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 695 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 696 % group, force a page break. 697 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 698 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 699 \page 700 \fi 701 \fi 702 \box\groupbox 703} 704 705% 706% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 707% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 708% 709\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 710group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 711where each line of input produces a line of output.} 712 713% @need space-in-mils 714% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 715 716\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 717 718\parseargdef\need{% 719 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 720 % paragraph. 721 \par 722 % 723 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 724 \dimen0 = #1\mil 725 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 726 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 727 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 728 % 729 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 730 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 731 % And a page break here is fine. 732 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 733 % 734 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 735 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 736 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 737 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 738 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 739 % 740 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 741 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 742 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 743 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 744 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 745 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 746 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 747 \penalty9999 748 % 749 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 750 \kern -#1\mil 751 % 752 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 753 \nobreak 754 \fi 755} 756 757% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 758 759\let\br = \par 760 761% @page forces the start of a new page. 762% 763\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 764 765% @exdent text.... 766% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 767 768% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 769% That's how much \exdent should take out. 770\newskip\exdentamount 771 772% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 773\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 774 775% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 776\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 777 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 778 779% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 780% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 781% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 782% 783\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 784\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 785% 786\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 787 \nobreak 788 \kern-\strutdepth 789 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 790 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 791 \vss 792 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 793 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 794 \ifx#1l% 795 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 796 \else 797 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 798 \fi 799 \null 800 }% 801}} 802\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 803\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 804% 805% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 806% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 807% else use TEXT for both). 808% 809\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 810\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 811 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 812 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 813 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 814 \def\righttext{#2}% 815 \else 816 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 817 \def\righttext{#1}% 818 \fi 819 % 820 \ifodd\pageno 821 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 822 \else 823 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 824 \fi 825 \temp 826} 827 828% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 829% 830\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 831\def\includezzz#1{% 832 \pushthisfilestack 833 \def\thisfile{#1}% 834 {% 835 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 836 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 837 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 838 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 839 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 840 % 841 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 842 % definitions, etc. 843 \expandafter 844 }\temp 845 \popthisfilestack 846} 847\def\filenamecatcodes{% 848 \catcode`\\=\other 849 \catcode`~=\other 850 \catcode`^=\other 851 \catcode`_=\other 852 \catcode`|=\other 853 \catcode`<=\other 854 \catcode`>=\other 855 \catcode`+=\other 856 \catcode`-=\other 857 \catcode`\`=\other 858 \catcode`\'=\other 859} 860 861\def\pushthisfilestack{% 862 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 863} 864\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 865 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 866} 867\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 868 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 869} 870 871\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 872\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 873 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 874% 875\def\thisfile{} 876 877% @center line 878% outputs that line, centered. 879% 880\parseargdef\center{% 881 \ifhmode 882 \let\centersub\centerH 883 \else 884 \let\centersub\centerV 885 \fi 886 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 887 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 888} 889\def\centerH#1{{% 890 \hfil\break 891 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 892 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 893 \line{#1}% 894 \break 895}} 896% 897\newcount\centerpenalty 898\def\centerV#1{% 899 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 900 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 901 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 902 % prevent a page break here. 903 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 904 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 905 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 906 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 907} 908 909% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 910% 911\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 912 913% @comment ...line which is ignored... 914% @c is the same as @comment 915% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 916 917 918\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 919\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 920\cxxx} 921{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 922% 923\let\comment\c 924 925% @paragraphindent NCHARS 926% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 927% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 928% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 929% 930\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 931\def\noneword{none} 932% 933\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 934 \def\temp{#1}% 935 \ifx\temp\asisword 936 \else 937 \ifx\temp\noneword 938 \defaultparindent = 0pt 939 \else 940 \defaultparindent = #1em 941 \fi 942 \fi 943 \parindent = \defaultparindent 944} 945 946% @exampleindent NCHARS 947% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 948% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 949% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 950\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 951 \def\temp{#1}% 952 \ifx\temp\asisword 953 \else 954 \ifx\temp\noneword 955 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 956 \else 957 \lispnarrowing = #1em 958 \fi 959 \fi 960} 961 962% @firstparagraphindent WORD 963% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 964% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 965% paragraphs. 966% 967% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 968% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 969% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 970% By default, we suppress indentation. 971% 972\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 973\def\insertword{insert} 974% 975\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 976 \def\temp{#1}% 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 979 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 980 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 981 \else 982 \errhelp = \EMsimple 983 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 984 \fi\fi 985} 986 987% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 988% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 989% 990% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 991% paragraph. 992% 993\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 994 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 995 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 996 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 997} 998% 999\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1000 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1001 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1002 \global\everypar = {}% 1003} 1004 1005% leave vertical mode without cancelling any first paragraph indent 1006\gdef\imageindent{% 1007 \toks0=\everypar 1008 \everypar={}% 1009 \ptexnoindent 1010 \global\everypar=\toks0 1011} 1012 1013 1014% @refill is a no-op. 1015\let\refill=\relax 1016 1017% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1018\let\setfilename=\comment 1019 1020% @bye. 1021\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1022 1023 1024\message{pdf,} 1025% adobe `portable' document format 1026\newcount\tempnum 1027\newcount\lnkcount 1028\newtoks\filename 1029\newcount\filenamelength 1030\newcount\pgn 1031\newtoks\toksA 1032\newtoks\toksB 1033\newtoks\toksC 1034\newtoks\toksD 1035\newbox\boxA 1036\newbox\boxB 1037\newcount\countA 1038\newif\ifpdf 1039\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1040 1041% 1042% For LuaTeX 1043% 1044 1045\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1046\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1047 1048\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1049\else 1050 % Use Unicode destination names 1051 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1052 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1053 \begingroup 1054 \catcode`\%=12 1055 \directlua{ 1056 function UTF16oct(str) 1057 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1058 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1059 if c < 0x10000 then 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1062 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1063 math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256))) 1064 else 1065 c = c - 0x10000 1066 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1067 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1068 tex.sprint( 1069 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1070 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1071 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1072 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1073 math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256), 1074 math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256))) 1075 end 1076 end 1077 end 1078 } 1079 \endgroup 1080 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1081 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1082 \begingroup 1083 \directlua{ 1084 function PDFescstr(str) 1085 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1086 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1087 tex.sprint(-2, 1088 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1089 c)) 1090 else 1091 tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c)) 1092 end 1093 end 1094 end 1095 } 1096 % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12 1097 % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See 1098 % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html 1099 % 1100 \endgroup 1101 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1102 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1103 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1104 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1105 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1106 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1107 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1108 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1109 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1110 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1111 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1112 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1113 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1114 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1115 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1116 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1117 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1118 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1119 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1120 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1121 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1122 \fi 1123\fi 1124 1125% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1126% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1127\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1128\else 1129 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1130 \else 1131 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1132 \else 1133 \pdftrue 1134 \fi 1135 \fi 1136\fi 1137 1138\newif\ifpdforxetex 1139\pdforxetexfalse 1140\ifpdf 1141 \pdforxetextrue 1142\fi 1143\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else 1144 \pdforxetextrue 1145\fi 1146 1147 1148% Output page labels information. 1149% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1. 1150\ifpdf 1151\def\pagelabels{% 1152 \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}% 1153 \edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}% 1154 \edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}% 1155 % 1156 % Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates. 1157 % (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is 1158 % a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.) 1159 % 1160 \ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi 1161 \ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}% 1162 \else 1163 \ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi 1164 \fi 1165 % 1166 \ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount 1167 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax 1168 \else 1169 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax 1170 \fi 1171} 1172\else 1173 \let\pagelabels\relax 1174\fi 1175 1176\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0 1177\newcount\romancount \romancount=0 1178\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0 1179\ifpdf 1180 \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno 1181 \def\advancepageno{% 1182 \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1 1183 } 1184\fi 1185 1186 1187% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1188% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1189% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1190% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1191% 1192% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1193% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1194% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1195% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1196% do this reliably, so we use it. 1197 1198% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1199% which we \xdef. 1200\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1201 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1202 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1203 % Many times it won't matter. 1204 \xdef#1{#1}% 1205 \else 1206 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1207 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1208 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1209 \fi 1210} 1211\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1212 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1213 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1214 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1215 \else 1216 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1217 \fi 1218} 1219 1220\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1221with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1222be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1223output) for that.)} 1224 1225\ifpdf 1226 % 1227 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1228 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1229 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1230 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1231 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1232 % black by default, though. 1233 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1234 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1235 % 1236 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1237 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1238 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1239 % 1240 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1241 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1242 \def\setcolor#1{% 1243 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1244 \domark 1245 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1246 } 1247 % 1248 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1249 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1250 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1251 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1252 % 1253 \def\makefootline{% 1254 \baselineskip24pt 1255 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1256 } 1257 % 1258 \def\makeheadline{% 1259 \vbox to 0pt{% 1260 \vskip-22.5pt 1261 \line{% 1262 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1263 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1264 \getcolormarks 1265 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1266 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1267 }% 1268 \vss 1269 }% 1270 \nointerlineskip 1271 } 1272 % 1273 % 1274 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1275 % 1276 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1277 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1278 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1279 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1280 % 1281 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1282 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1283 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1284 % bitmap. 1285 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1286 \begingroup 1287 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1288 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1289 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1290 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1291 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1292 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1293 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1294 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1295 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1296 \fi 1297 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1298 \fi 1299 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1300 \fi 1301 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1302 \fi 1303 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1304 \fi 1305 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1306 \fi 1307 \closein 1 1308 \endgroup 1309 % 1310 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1311 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1312 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1313 \immediate\pdfimage 1314 \else 1315 \immediate\pdfximage 1316 \fi 1317 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1318 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1319 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1320 #1.\pdfimgext 1321 \else 1322 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1323 \fi 1324 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1325 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1326 \fi} 1327 % 1328 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1329 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1330 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1331 \indexnofonts 1332 \makevalueexpandable 1333 \turnoffactive 1334 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1335 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1336 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1337 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1338 \else 1339 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1340 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1341 \else 1342 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1343 \passthroughcharsfalse 1344 \fi 1345 \fi 1346 \else 1347 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1348 \passthroughcharsfalse 1349 \fi 1350 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1351 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1352 }} 1353 % 1354 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1355 \indexnofonts 1356 \makevalueexpandable 1357 \turnoffactive 1358 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1359 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1360 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1361 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1362 \passthroughcharstrue 1363 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1364 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1365 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1366 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1367 \else 1368 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1369 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1370 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1371 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1372 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1373 % Use ASCII approximations. 1374 \passthroughcharsfalse 1375 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1376 \else 1377 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1378 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1379 \passthroughcharstrue 1380 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1381 \fi 1382 \else 1383 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1384 % Use ASCII approximations. 1385 \passthroughcharsfalse 1386 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1387 \fi 1388 \fi 1389 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1390 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1391 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1392 }} 1393 % 1394 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1395 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1396 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1397 } 1398 % 1399 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1400 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1401 % 1402 % by default, use black for everything. 1403 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1404 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1405 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1406 % 1407 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1408 % come from Petr Olsak 1409 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1410 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1411 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1412 \advance\tempnum by 1 1413 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1414 % 1415 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1416 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1417 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1418 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1419 % #4 is the page number 1420 % 1421 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1422 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1423 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1424 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1425 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1426 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1427 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1428 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1429 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1430 \fi 1431 % 1432 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1433 } 1434 % 1435 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1436 \begingroup 1437 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1438 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1439 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1440 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1441 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1442 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1443 }% 1444 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1445 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1446 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1447 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1448 }% 1449 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1450 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1451 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1452 }% 1453 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1454 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1455 }% 1456 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1457 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1458 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1459 % 1460 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1461 % al. a second time, below. 1462 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1463 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1464 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1465 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1466 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1467 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1468 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1469 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1470 \readdatafile{toc}% 1471 % 1472 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1473 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1474 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1475 % 1476 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1477 % 1478 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1479 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1480 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1481 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1482 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1483 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1484 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1485 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1486 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1487 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1488 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1489 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1490 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1491 % 1492 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1493 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1494 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1495 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1496 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1497 % 1498 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1499 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1500 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1501 % we use for the index sort strings. 1502 % 1503 \indexnofonts 1504 \setupdatafile 1505 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1506 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1507 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1508 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1509 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1510 \input \tocreadfilename 1511 \endgroup 1512 } 1513 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1514 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1515 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1516 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1517 ] 1518 % 1519 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1520 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1521 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1522 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1523 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1524 \fi 1525 \nextsp} 1526 \def\getfilename#1{% 1527 \filenamelength=0 1528 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1529 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1530 \edef\temp{#1}% 1531 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1532 } 1533 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1534 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1535 \else 1536 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1537 \fi 1538 % make a live url in pdf output. 1539 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1540 \begingroup 1541 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1542 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1543 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1544 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1545 % 1546 \normalturnoffactive 1547 \def\@{@}% 1548 \let\/=\empty 1549 \makevalueexpandable 1550 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1551 % special-casing \var here? 1552 \def\var##1{##1}% 1553 % 1554 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1555 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1556 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1557 \endgroup} 1558 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1559 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1560 % entry. 1561 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1562 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1563 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1564 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1565 \def\maketoks{% 1566 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1567 \ifx\first0\adn0 1568 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1569 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1570 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1571 \else 1572 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1573 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1574 \let\next=\maketoks 1575 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1576 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1577 \fi 1578 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1579 \next} 1580 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1581 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1582 \def\pdflink#1{% 1583 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1584 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1585 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1586\else 1587 % non-pdf mode 1588 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1589 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1590 \let\endlink = \relax 1591 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1592 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1593 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1594\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1595 1596% 1597% For XeTeX 1598% 1599\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1600\else 1601 % 1602 % XeTeX version check 1603 % 1604 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1605 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1606 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1607 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1608 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1609 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1610 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1611 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1612 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1613 \else 1614 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1615 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1616 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1617 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1618 % 1619 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1620 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1621 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1622 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1623 \fi 1624 % 1625 % Color support 1626 % 1627 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1628 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1629 % 1630 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1631 % 1632 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1633 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1634 \def\setcolor#1{% 1635 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1636 \domark 1637 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1638 } 1639 % 1640 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1641 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1642 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1643 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1644 % 1645 \def\makefootline{% 1646 \baselineskip24pt 1647 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1648 } 1649 % 1650 \def\makeheadline{% 1651 \vbox to 0pt{% 1652 \vskip-22.5pt 1653 \line{% 1654 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1655 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1656 \getcolormarks 1657 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1658 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1659 }% 1660 \vss 1661 }% 1662 \nointerlineskip 1663 } 1664 % 1665 % PDF outline support 1666 % 1667 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1668 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1669 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1673 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1674 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1675 \indexnofonts 1676 \makevalueexpandable 1677 \turnoffactive 1678 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1679 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1680 \else 1681 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1682 \passthroughcharsfalse 1683 \fi 1684 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1685 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1686 }} 1687 % 1688 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1689 \turnoffactive 1690 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1691 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1692 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1693 % So we do not convert. 1694 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1695 }} 1696 % 1697 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1698 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1699 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1700 } 1701 % 1702 % by default, use black for everything. 1703 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1704 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1705 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1706 % 1707 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1708 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1709 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1710 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1711 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1712 \fi 1713 % 1714 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1715 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1716 } 1717 % 1718 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1719 \begingroup 1720 % 1721 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1722 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1723 % 1724 % We use node names as destinations. 1725 % 1726 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1727 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1728 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1729 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1730 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1731 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1732 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1733 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1734 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1735 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1736 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1737 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1738 % 1739 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1740 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1741 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1742 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1743 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1744 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1745 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1746 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1747 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1748 % 1749 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1750 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1751 % 1752 \indexnofonts 1753 \setupdatafile 1754 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1755 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1756 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1757 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1758 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1759 \input \tocreadfilename 1760 \endgroup 1761 } 1762 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1763 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1764 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1765 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1766 ] 1767 1768 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1769 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1770 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1771 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1772 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1773 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1774% 1775 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1776 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1777 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1778 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1779 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1780 \fi 1781 \nextsp} 1782 \def\getfilename#1{% 1783 \filenamelength=0 1784 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1785 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1786 \edef\temp{#1}% 1787 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1788 } 1789 % make a live url in pdf output. 1790 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1791 \begingroup 1792 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1793 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1794 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1795 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1796 % 1797 \normalturnoffactive 1798 \def\@{@}% 1799 \let\/=\empty 1800 \makevalueexpandable 1801 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1802 % special-casing \var here? 1803 \def\var##1{##1}% 1804 % 1805 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1806 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1807 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1808 \endgroup} 1809 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1810 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1811 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1812 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1813 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1814 \def\maketoks{% 1815 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1816 \ifx\first0\adn0 1817 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1818 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1819 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1820 \else 1821 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1822 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1823 \let\next=\maketoks 1824 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1825 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1826 \fi 1827 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1828 \next} 1829 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1830 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1831 \def\pdflink#1{% 1832 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1833 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1834 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1835 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1836% 1837 % 1838 % @image support 1839 % 1840 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1841 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1842 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1843 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1844 % 1845 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1846 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1847 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1848 % bitmap. 1849 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1850 \begingroup 1851 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1852 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1853 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1854 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1855 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1856 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1857 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1858 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1859 \fi 1860 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1861 \fi 1862 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1863 \fi 1864 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1865 \fi 1866 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1867 \fi 1868 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1869 \fi 1870 \closein 1 1871 \endgroup 1872 % 1873 % Putting an \hbox around the image can prevent an over-long line 1874 % after the image. 1875 \hbox\bgroup 1876 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1877 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1878 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1879 \else 1880 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1881 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1882 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1883 \else 1884 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1885 \fi 1886 \fi 1887 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1888 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1889 \egroup 1890 } 1891\fi 1892 1893 1894% 1895\message{fonts,} 1896 1897% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1898% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1899% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1900% 1901\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1902\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1903\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1904% 1905% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1906\def\baselinefactor{1} 1907% 1908\newdimen\textleading 1909\def\setleading#1{% 1910 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1911 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1912 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1913 \normalbaselines 1914 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1915 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1916 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1917 }% 1918} 1919 1920% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1921% 1922% do nothing with this by default. 1923\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1924\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1925\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1926 1927% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1928% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1929% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1930\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1931 \begingroup 1932 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1933 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1934%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1935%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1936%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1937%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1938%%Version: 1.000 1939%%EndComments 1940/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 194112 dict begin 1942begincmap 1943/CIDSystemInfo 1944<< /Registry (TeX) 1945/Ordering (OT1) 1946/Supplement 0 1947>> def 1948/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1949/CMapType 2 def 19501 begincodespacerange 1951<00> <7F> 1952endcodespacerange 19538 beginbfrange 1954<00> <01> <0393> 1955<09> <0A> <03A8> 1956<23> <26> <0023> 1957<28> <3B> <0028> 1958<3F> <5B> <003F> 1959<5D> <5E> <005D> 1960<61> <7A> <0061> 1961<7B> <7C> <2013> 1962endbfrange 196340 beginbfchar 1964<02> <0398> 1965<03> <039B> 1966<04> <039E> 1967<05> <03A0> 1968<06> <03A3> 1969<07> <03D2> 1970<08> <03A6> 1971<0B> <00660066> 1972<0C> <00660069> 1973<0D> <0066006C> 1974<0E> <006600660069> 1975<0F> <00660066006C> 1976<10> <0131> 1977<11> <0237> 1978<12> <0060> 1979<13> <00B4> 1980<14> <02C7> 1981<15> <02D8> 1982<16> <00AF> 1983<17> <02DA> 1984<18> <00B8> 1985<19> <00DF> 1986<1A> <00E6> 1987<1B> <0153> 1988<1C> <00F8> 1989<1D> <00C6> 1990<1E> <0152> 1991<1F> <00D8> 1992<21> <0021> 1993<22> <201D> 1994<27> <2019> 1995<3C> <00A1> 1996<3D> <003D> 1997<3E> <00BF> 1998<5C> <201C> 1999<5F> <02D9> 2000<60> <2018> 2001<7D> <02DD> 2002<7E> <007E> 2003<7F> <00A8> 2004endbfchar 2005endcmap 2006CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2007end 2008end 2009%%EndResource 2010%%EOF 2011 }\endgroup 2012 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 2013 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2014 }% 2015% 2016% \cmapOT1IT 2017 \begingroup 2018 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2019 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2020%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2021%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2022%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 2023%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 2024%%Version: 1.000 2025%%EndComments 2026/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 202712 dict begin 2028begincmap 2029/CIDSystemInfo 2030<< /Registry (TeX) 2031/Ordering (OT1IT) 2032/Supplement 0 2033>> def 2034/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 2035/CMapType 2 def 20361 begincodespacerange 2037<00> <7F> 2038endcodespacerange 20398 beginbfrange 2040<00> <01> <0393> 2041<09> <0A> <03A8> 2042<25> <26> <0025> 2043<28> <3B> <0028> 2044<3F> <5B> <003F> 2045<5D> <5E> <005D> 2046<61> <7A> <0061> 2047<7B> <7C> <2013> 2048endbfrange 204942 beginbfchar 2050<02> <0398> 2051<03> <039B> 2052<04> <039E> 2053<05> <03A0> 2054<06> <03A3> 2055<07> <03D2> 2056<08> <03A6> 2057<0B> <00660066> 2058<0C> <00660069> 2059<0D> <0066006C> 2060<0E> <006600660069> 2061<0F> <00660066006C> 2062<10> <0131> 2063<11> <0237> 2064<12> <0060> 2065<13> <00B4> 2066<14> <02C7> 2067<15> <02D8> 2068<16> <00AF> 2069<17> <02DA> 2070<18> <00B8> 2071<19> <00DF> 2072<1A> <00E6> 2073<1B> <0153> 2074<1C> <00F8> 2075<1D> <00C6> 2076<1E> <0152> 2077<1F> <00D8> 2078<21> <0021> 2079<22> <201D> 2080<23> <0023> 2081<24> <00A3> 2082<27> <2019> 2083<3C> <00A1> 2084<3D> <003D> 2085<3E> <00BF> 2086<5C> <201C> 2087<5F> <02D9> 2088<60> <2018> 2089<7D> <02DD> 2090<7E> <007E> 2091<7F> <00A8> 2092endbfchar 2093endcmap 2094CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2095end 2096end 2097%%EndResource 2098%%EOF 2099 }\endgroup 2100 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2101 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2102 }% 2103% 2104% \cmapOT1TT 2105 \begingroup 2106 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2107 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2108%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2109%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2110%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2111%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2112%%Version: 1.000 2113%%EndComments 2114/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 211512 dict begin 2116begincmap 2117/CIDSystemInfo 2118<< /Registry (TeX) 2119/Ordering (OT1TT) 2120/Supplement 0 2121>> def 2122/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2123/CMapType 2 def 21241 begincodespacerange 2125<00> <7F> 2126endcodespacerange 21275 beginbfrange 2128<00> <01> <0393> 2129<09> <0A> <03A8> 2130<21> <26> <0021> 2131<28> <5F> <0028> 2132<61> <7E> <0061> 2133endbfrange 213432 beginbfchar 2135<02> <0398> 2136<03> <039B> 2137<04> <039E> 2138<05> <03A0> 2139<06> <03A3> 2140<07> <03D2> 2141<08> <03A6> 2142<0B> <2191> 2143<0C> <2193> 2144<0D> <0027> 2145<0E> <00A1> 2146<0F> <00BF> 2147<10> <0131> 2148<11> <0237> 2149<12> <0060> 2150<13> <00B4> 2151<14> <02C7> 2152<15> <02D8> 2153<16> <00AF> 2154<17> <02DA> 2155<18> <00B8> 2156<19> <00DF> 2157<1A> <00E6> 2158<1B> <0153> 2159<1C> <00F8> 2160<1D> <00C6> 2161<1E> <0152> 2162<1F> <00D8> 2163<20> <2423> 2164<27> <2019> 2165<60> <2018> 2166<7F> <00A8> 2167endbfchar 2168endcmap 2169CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2170end 2171end 2172%%EndResource 2173%%EOF 2174 }\endgroup 2175 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2176 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2177 }% 2178\fi\fi 2179 2180 2181% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2182% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2183% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2184% Example: 2185% #1 = \textrm 2186% #2 = \rmshape 2187% #3 = 10 2188% #4 = \mainmagstep 2189% #5 = OT1 2190% 2191\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2192 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2193 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2194} 2195% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2196\let\cmap\gobble 2197% 2198% (end of cmaps) 2199 2200% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2201% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2202% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2203\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2204\def\fontprefix{cm} 2205\fi 2206% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2207\def\rmshape{r} 2208\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2209\def\bfshape{b} 2210\def\bxshape{bx} 2211\def\ttshape{tt} 2212\def\ttbshape{tt} 2213\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2214\def\itshape{ti} 2215\def\itbshape{bxti} 2216\def\slshape{sl} 2217\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2218\def\sfshape{ss} 2219\def\sfbshape{ss} 2220\def\scshape{csc} 2221\def\scbshape{csc} 2222 2223% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2224% 2225\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2226% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2227\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2228\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2229\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2230\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2231\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2232\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2233\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2234\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2235\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2236\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2237\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2238\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2239\def\textecsize{1095} 2240 2241% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2242\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2243\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2245\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2246\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2247\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2248 2249% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2250\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2251\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2252\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2253\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2254\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2255\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2256\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2257\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2258\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2259\font\smalli=cmmi9 2260\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2261\def\smallecsize{0900} 2262 2263% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2264\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2265\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2266\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2267\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2268\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2269\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2270\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2271\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2272\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2273\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2274\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2275\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2276 2277% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2278\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2279\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2280\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2281\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2282\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2283\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2284\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2285\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2286\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2287\font\seveni=cmmi7 2288\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2289\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2290 2291% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2292\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2293\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2294\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2295\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2296\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2297\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2298\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2299\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2300\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2301\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2302\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2303\def\titleecsize{2074} 2304 2305% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2306\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2307\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2308\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2309\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2310\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2311\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2312\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2313\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2314\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2315\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2316\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2317\def\chapecsize{1728} 2318 2319% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2320\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2321\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2322\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2323\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2324\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2325\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2327\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2328\let\secbf\secrm 2329\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2330\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2331\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2332\def\sececsize{1440} 2333 2334% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2335\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2336\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2337\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2338\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2339\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2341\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2342\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2343\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2344\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2345\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2346\def\ssececsize{1200} 2347 2348% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2349\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2350\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2352\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2353\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2354\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2355\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2356\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2357\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2358\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2359\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2360\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2361 2362\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2363\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2364\rm 2365} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2366 2367 2368% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2369% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2370% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2371% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2372% 2373\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2374% Text fonts (10pt). 2375\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2376\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2377\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2378\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2380\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2381\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2382\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2383\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2384\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2385\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2386\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2387\def\textecsize{1000} 2388 2389% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2390\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2391\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2393\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2394\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2395\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2396 2397% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2398\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2399\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2400\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2401\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2402\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2403\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2404\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2405\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2406\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2407\font\smalli=cmmi9 2408\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2409\def\smallecsize{0900} 2410 2411% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2412\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2413\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2414\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2415\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2416\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2417\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2418\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2419\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2420\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2421\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2422\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2423\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2424 2425% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2426\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2427\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2428\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2429\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2430\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2431\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2432\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2433\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2434\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2435\font\seveni=cmmi7 2436\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2437\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2438 2439% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2440\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2441\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2442\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2443\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2444\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2445\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2446\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2447\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2448\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2449\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2450\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2451\def\titleecsize{2074} 2452 2453% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2454\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2455\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2456\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2457\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2458\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2459\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2460\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2461\let\chapbf\chaprm 2462\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2463\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2464\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2465\def\chapecsize{1440} 2466 2467% Section fonts (12pt). 2468\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2469\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2470\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2471\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2472\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2473\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2474\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2475\let\secbf\secrm 2476\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2477\font\seci=cmmi12 2478\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2479\def\sececsize{1200} 2480 2481% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2482\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2483\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2484\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2485\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2486\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2487\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2488\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2489\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2490\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2491\font\sseci=cmmi10 2492\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2493\def\ssececsize{1000} 2494 2495% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2496\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2497\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2498\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2499\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2500\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2501\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2502\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2503\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2504\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2505\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2506\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2507\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2508 2509\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2510\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2511\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2512\rm 2513} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2514 2515% Fonts for short table of contents. 2516\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2517\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2518\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2519\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2520 2521 2522% We provide the user-level command 2523% @fonttextsize 10 2524% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2525% 2526\def\xiword{11} 2527\def\xword{10} 2528\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2529% 2530\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2531 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2532 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2533 % 2534 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2535 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2536 % 2537 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2538 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2539 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2540 \else 2541 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2542 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2543 \fi\fi 2544 \endgroup 2545} 2546 2547% 2548% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2549% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2550% italics, not bold italics. 2551% 2552\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2553 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2554 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2555} 2556 2557\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2558\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2559\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2560\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2561\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt} 2562 2563% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2564% So we set up a \sf. 2565\newfam\sffam 2566\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2567 2568% We don't need math for this font style. 2569\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2570 2571 2572% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2573% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2574% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2575% 2576\def\resetmathfonts{% 2577 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2578 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2579 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2580 % 2581 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2582 % of the current font size. 2583 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2584 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2585 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2586 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2587} 2588 2589% 2590 2591% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2592% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2593% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2594% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2595% 2596% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2597% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2598% 2599% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2600% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2601% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2602% 2603% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2604% 2605 2606\def\assignfonts#1{% 2607 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2608 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2609 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2610 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2611 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2612 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2613 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2614 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2615 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2616 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2617} 2618 2619\newif\ifrmisbold 2620 2621% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2622% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2623% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2624\def\switchtolllsize{% 2625 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2626 \ifrmisbold 2627 \let\rmfont\bffont 2628 \fi 2629 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2630}% 2631 2632\def\switchtolsize{% 2633 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2634 \ifrmisbold 2635 \let\rmfont\bffont 2636 \fi 2637 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2638}% 2639 2640\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2641\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2642 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2643 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2644 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2645 \assignfonts{#1}% 2646 \resetmathfonts 2647 \setleading{#4}% 2648}} 2649 2650\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2651\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2652\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2653\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2654\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2655\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2656\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2657\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2658 2659\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2660\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2661\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2662 2663% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2664\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2665\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2666 2667% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2668\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2669 2670% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2671% can fit this many characters: 2672% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2673% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2674% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2675% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2676% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2677% 2678% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2679% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2680% --karl, 24jan03. 2681 2682% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2683% 2684\definetextfontsizexi 2685 2686 2687% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2688% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2689% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2690% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2691% 2692\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2693 2694{ 2695\catcode`\'=\active 2696\catcode`\`=\active 2697 2698\gdef\setcodequotes{\let`\codequoteleft \let'\codequoteright} 2699\gdef\setregularquotes{\let`\lq \let'\rq} 2700} 2701 2702% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2703% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2704% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2705% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2706% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2707% 2708\def\codequoteright{% 2709 \ifmonospace 2710 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2711 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2712 '% 2713 \else \char'15 \fi 2714 \else \char'15 \fi 2715 \else 2716 '% 2717 \fi 2718} 2719% 2720% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2721% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2722% the code environments to do likewise. 2723% 2724\def\codequoteleft{% 2725 \ifmonospace 2726 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2728 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2729 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2730 \relax`% 2731 \else \char'22 \fi 2732 \else \char'22 \fi 2733 \else 2734 \relax`% 2735 \fi 2736} 2737 2738% Commands to set the quote options. 2739% 2740\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2741 \def\temp{#1}% 2742 \ifx\temp\onword 2743 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2744 = t% 2745 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2746 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2747 = \relax 2748 \else 2749 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2750 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2751 \fi\fi 2752} 2753% 2754\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2755 \def\temp{#1}% 2756 \ifx\temp\onword 2757 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2758 = t% 2759 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2760 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2761 = \relax 2762 \else 2763 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2764 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2765 \fi\fi 2766} 2767 2768% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2769\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2770 2771% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2772\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2773 2774% Font commands. 2775 2776% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2777% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2778% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2779\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2780 \ifusingtt 2781 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2782 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2783 \next 2784} 2785\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2786\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2787 2788% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2789% character) is such as not to need one. 2790\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2791 \ifx\next,% 2792 \else\ifx\next-% 2793 \else\ifx\next.% 2794 \else\ifx\next\.% 2795 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2796 \else\ptexslash 2797 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2798 \aftersmartic 2799} 2800 2801% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2802\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2803 2804% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2805% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2806\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2807 2808\def\aftersmartic{} 2809\def\var#1{% 2810 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2811 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2812 \smartslanted{#1}% 2813} 2814 2815\let\i=\smartitalic 2816\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2817\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2818\let\emph=\smartitalic 2819 2820% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2821\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2822\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2823\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2824 2825% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2826\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2827\let\strong=\b 2828 2829% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2830\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2831 2832% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2833% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2834% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2835% 2836\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2837\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2838 2839% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2840% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2841% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2842% 2843\catcode`@=11 2844 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2845 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2846 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2847 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2848 } 2849 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2850 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2851 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2852 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2853 } 2854\catcode`@=\other 2855\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2856 2857% @t, explicit typewriter. 2858\def\t#1{% 2859 {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2860 \null 2861} 2862 2863% @samp. 2864\def\samp#1{{\setcodequotes\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2865 2866% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2867\let\indicateurl=\samp 2868 2869% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2870% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2871% This is a subroutine for that. 2872\def\tclose#1{% 2873 {% 2874 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2875 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2876 % 2877 % Switch to typewriter. 2878 \tt 2879 % 2880 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2881 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2882 % 2883 % Turn off hyphenation. 2884 \nohyphenation 2885 % 2886 \plainfrenchspacing 2887 #1% 2888 }% 2889 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2890} 2891 2892% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2893% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2894% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2895% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2896% 2897% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2898% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2899% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2900% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2901{ 2902 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2903 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2904 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2905 % 2906 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2907 \setcodequotes 2908 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2909 \ifallowcodebreaks 2910 \let-\codedash 2911 \let_\codeunder 2912 \else 2913 \let-\normaldash 2914 \let_\realunder 2915 \fi 2916 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2917 % after the hyphen. 2918 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2919 % 2920 \codex 2921 } 2922 % 2923 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2924 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2925 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2926 % 2927 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2928 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2929 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2930 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2931 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2932 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2933 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2934 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2935 \fi 2936 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2937 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2938 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2939 } 2940} 2941\def\normaldash{-} 2942% 2943\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2944 2945\def\codeunder{% 2946 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2947 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2948 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2949 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2950 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2951 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2952 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2953 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2954 {\_}% 2955} 2956 2957% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2958% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2959% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2960% and _ on and off. 2961% 2962\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2963 2964\def\keywordtrue{true} 2965\def\keywordfalse{false} 2966 2967\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2968 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2969 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2970 \allowcodebreakstrue 2971 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2972 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2973 \else 2974 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2975 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2976 \fi\fi 2977} 2978 2979% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2980% so use \code rather than \samp. 2981\let\command=\code 2982\let\env=\code 2983\let\file=\code 2984\let\option=\code 2985 2986% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2987% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2988% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2989% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2990 2991% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2992% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2993\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2994 2995% The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in 2996% \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to 2997% a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not 2998% conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere. 2999\def\nopretolerance{% 3000\pretolerance=-1 3001\def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}% 3002} 3003 3004% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 3005% places within the url. 3006\def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 3007\let\uref=\urefbreak 3008% 3009\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 3010\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 3011 \unsepspaces 3012 \pdfurl{#1}% 3013 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 3014 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3015 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 3016 \else 3017 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3018 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3019 \ifpdf 3020 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3021 \ifurefurlonlylink 3022 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3023 \unhbox0 3024 \else 3025 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3026 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3027 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3028 \fi 3029 \else 3030 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3031 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3032 \else 3033 % For XeTeX 3034 \ifurefurlonlylink 3035 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3036 \unhbox0 3037 \else 3038 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3039 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3040 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3041 \fi 3042 \fi 3043 \fi 3044 \else 3045 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3046 \fi 3047 \fi 3048 \endlink 3049\endgroup} 3050 3051% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3052\def\urefcatcodes{% 3053 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3054 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3055 \catcode`\/=\active 3056} 3057{ 3058 \urefcatcodes 3059 % 3060 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3061 \setcodequotes 3062 \urefcatcodes 3063 \let&\urefcodeamp 3064 \let.\urefcodedot 3065 \let#\urefcodehash 3066 \let?\urefcodequest 3067 \let/\urefcodeslash 3068 \codex 3069 } 3070 % 3071 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3072 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3073 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3074 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3075 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3076 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3077} 3078 3079\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3080\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3081\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3082\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3083\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3084{ 3085 \catcode`\/=\active 3086 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3087 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3088 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3089 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3090 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3091 } 3092} 3093 3094% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3095% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3096% all, for manual control. 3097% 3098\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3099 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3100 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3101 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3102 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3103 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3104 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3105 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3106 \else 3107 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3108 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3109 \fi\fi\fi 3110} 3111\def\wordafter{after} 3112\def\wordbefore{before} 3113\def\wordnone{none} 3114 3115% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can 3116% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in 3117% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added 3118% at the end of the line, or no break at all here. 3119% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how 3120% preferable one choice is over the other. 3121\def\urefallowbreak{% 3122 \penalty0\relax 3123 \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax 3124 \penalty1000\relax 3125 \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax 3126} 3127 3128\urefbreakstyle after 3129 3130% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3131% 3132\let\url=\uref 3133 3134% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3135% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3136% 3137%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3138\ifpdforxetex 3139 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3140 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3141 \unsepspaces 3142 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3143 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3144 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3145 \endlink 3146 \endgroup} 3147\else 3148 \let\email=\uref 3149\fi 3150 3151% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3152% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3153% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3154\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3155 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3156 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3157 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3158 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3159 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3160 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3161 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3162 \else 3163 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3164 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3165 \fi\fi\fi 3166} 3167\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3168\def\wordexample{example} 3169\def\wordcode{code} 3170 3171% Default is `distinct'. 3172\kbdinputstyle distinct 3173 3174% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3175% then @kbd has no effect. 3176\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3177 3178\def\xkey{\key} 3179\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3180 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3181 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3182 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3183 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3184} 3185 3186% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3187%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3188%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3189%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3190% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3191% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3192% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3193% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3194% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3195 3196% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3197% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3198% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3199% 3200\def\key#1{{\setregularquotes 3201 \nohyphenation 3202 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3203 #1}\null} 3204 3205% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3206\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3207 3208% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3209\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3210\def\click{\arrow} 3211 3212% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3213% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3214% 3215\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3216 3217% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3218% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3219% all-uppercase. 3220% 3221\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3222\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3223 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3224 \def\temp{#2}% 3225 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3226 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3227 \fi 3228 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3229} 3230 3231% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3232% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3233% 3234\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3235\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3236 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3237 \def\temp{#2}% 3238 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3239 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3240 \fi 3241 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3242} 3243 3244% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3245% 3246\def\asis#1{#1} 3247 3248% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3249% 3250% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3251% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3252% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3253% which is what @var uses. 3254{ 3255 \catcode`\_ = \active 3256 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3257 \catcode`\_=\active 3258 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3259 } 3260} 3261% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3262% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3263% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3264% 3265% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3266\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3267% 3268\def\math{% 3269 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3270 \tex 3271 \mathunderscore 3272 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3273 \mathactive 3274 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3275 \let\"=\ddot 3276 \let\'=\acute 3277 \let\==\bar 3278 \let\^=\hat 3279 \let\`=\grave 3280 \let\u=\breve 3281 \let\v=\check 3282 \let\~=\tilde 3283 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3284 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3285 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3286 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3287} 3288\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3289 3290% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3291% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3292% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3293% 3294{ 3295 \catcode`^ = \active 3296 \catcode`< = \active 3297 \catcode`> = \active 3298 \catcode`+ = \active 3299 \catcode`' = \active 3300 \gdef\mathactive{% 3301 \let^ = \ptexhat 3302 \let< = \ptexless 3303 \let> = \ptexgtr 3304 \let+ = \ptexplus 3305 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3306 } 3307} 3308 3309% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3310% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3311% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3312% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3313% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3314% 3315\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3316\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3317% 3318\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3319\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3320 3321% provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common 3322\def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}} 3323 3324% @displaymath. 3325% \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and 3326% \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex. 3327{\obeylines 3328\globaldefs=1 3329\envdef\displaymath{% 3330\tex% 3331\def\thisenv{\displaymath}% 3332\begingroup\let\end\displaymathend% 3333$$% 3334} 3335 3336\def\displaymathend{$$\endgroup\end}% 3337 3338\def\Edisplaymath{% 3339\def\thisenv{\tex}% 3340\end tex 3341}} 3342 3343 3344% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3345% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3346% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3347% 3348\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3349% 3350\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3351\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3352 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3353 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3354} 3355% 3356% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3357% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3358\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3359\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3360 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3361 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3362} 3363% 3364% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3365% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3366% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3367% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3368% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3369% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3370% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3371% 3372\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3373\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3374\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3375 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3376 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3377 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3378} 3379 3380% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3381% 3382\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3383\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3384 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3385 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3386 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3387} 3388 3389% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3390% 3391\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3392\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3393 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3394 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3395} 3396 3397 3398\message{glyphs,} 3399% and logos. 3400 3401% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3402\def\@{\char64 } 3403\let\atchar=\@ 3404 3405% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3406\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3407\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3408\let\{=\lbracechar 3409\let\}=\rbracechar 3410 3411% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3412\let\comma = , 3413 3414% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3415% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3416\let\, = \ptexc 3417\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3418\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3419\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3420\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3421\let\udotaccent = \d 3422 3423% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3424% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3425\def\questiondown{?`} 3426\def\exclamdown{!`} 3427\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3428\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3429 3430% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3431\def\imacro{i} 3432\def\jmacro{j} 3433\def\dotless#1{% 3434 \def\temp{#1}% 3435 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3436 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3437 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3438 \fi\fi 3439} 3440 3441% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3442% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3443% 3444\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3445 3446% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3447% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3448% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3449% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3450% \scriptscriptstyle). 3451% 3452\def\LaTeX{% 3453 L\kern-.36em 3454 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3455 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3456 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3457 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3458 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3459 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3460 \else 3461 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3462 \switchtolllsize A% 3463 \fi 3464 }% 3465 \vss 3466 }}% 3467 \kern-.15em 3468 \TeX 3469} 3470 3471% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3472% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3473% but safer, and can't hurt. 3474\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3475\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3476% 3477\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3478\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3479\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3480\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3481 3482% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3483% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3484% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3485% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3486% whichever is larger. 3487% 3488\def\dots{% 3489 \leavevmode 3490 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3491 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3492 \dimen0 = \wd0 3493 \else 3494 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3495 \fi 3496 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3497 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3498 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3499 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3500 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3501 }% 3502} 3503 3504% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3505% 3506\def\enddots{% 3507 \dots 3508 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3509} 3510 3511% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3512% 3513% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3514% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3515% 3516\def\point{$\star$} 3517\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3518\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3519\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3520\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3521\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3522 3523% The @error{} command. 3524% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3525% 3526\newbox\errorbox 3527% 3528{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3529\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3530% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3531\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3532% 3533\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3534 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3535 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3536 \vbox{% 3537 \hrule height\dimen2 3538 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3539 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3540 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3541 \hrule height\dimen2} 3542 \hfil} 3543% 3544\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3545 3546% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3547% 3548\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi} 3549 3550% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3551% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3552% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3553% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3554% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3555% 3556% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3557% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3558% font height. 3559% 3560% feymr - regular 3561% feymo - slanted 3562% feybr - bold 3563% feybo - bold slanted 3564% 3565% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3566% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3567% Hmm. 3568% 3569% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3570% Hope not. 3571% 3572% 3573\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3574\def\eurofont{% 3575 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3576 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3577 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3578 % font installed. 3579 % 3580 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3581 % that to the current nominal size. 3582 % 3583 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3584 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3585 % 3586 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3587 % 3588 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3589 % bold: 3590 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3591 \else 3592 % regular: 3593 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3594 \fi 3595 \thiseurofont 3596} 3597 3598% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3599% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3600% the redefinition. 3601% 3602% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3603\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3604\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3605\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3606\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3607% 3608\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3609\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3610\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3611\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3612\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3613\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3614\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3615\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3616% 3617% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3618% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3619% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3620% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3621% 3622% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3623% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3624% the same EC font. 3625\def\ogonek#1{{% 3626 \def\temp{#1}% 3627 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3628 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3629 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3630 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3631 \else 3632 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3633 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3634 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3635 \fi 3636 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3637 }% 3638} 3639\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3640\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3641\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3642\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3643% 3644% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3645% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3646% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3647% package and follow the same conventions. 3648% 3649\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3650\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3651% 3652\def\etcfont#1{% 3653 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3654 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3655 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3656 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3657 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3658 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3659 \ifmonospace 3660 % typewriter: 3661 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3662 \else 3663 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3664 % bold: 3665 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3666 \else 3667 % regular: 3668 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3669 \fi 3670 \fi 3671 \thisecfont 3672} 3673 3674% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3675% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3676% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3677% 3678\def\registeredsymbol{% 3679 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3680 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3681 }$% 3682} 3683 3684% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3685% 3686\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3687 3688% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3689% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3690% so we'll define it if necessary. 3691% 3692\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3693\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3694\fi 3695 3696% Quotes. 3697\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3698\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3699 3700% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using 3701% \ecfont unless necessary. 3702\def\quotedblleft{% 3703 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi 3704} 3705 3706\def\quotedblright{% 3707 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi 3708} 3709 3710 3711\message{page headings,} 3712 3713\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3714\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3715 3716% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3717\newif\ifseenauthor 3718\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3719 3720% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3721% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3722\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3723 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3724 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3725 after the title page.}}% 3726\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3727 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3728 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3729 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3730 3731\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3732 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3733 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3734 3735\envdef\titlepage{% 3736 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3737 \begingroup 3738 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3739 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3740 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3741 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3742 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3743 % 3744 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3745 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3746 \let\oldpage = \page 3747 \def\page{% 3748 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3749 \finishtitlepage 3750 \fi 3751 \let\page = \oldpage 3752 \page 3753 \null 3754 }% 3755} 3756 3757\def\Etitlepage{% 3758 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3759 \finishtitlepage 3760 \fi 3761 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3762 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3763 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3764 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3765 \oldpage 3766 \endgroup 3767 % 3768 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3769 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3770 \HEADINGSon 3771} 3772 3773\def\finishtitlepage{% 3774 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3775 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3776 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3777} 3778 3779% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3780% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3781% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3782% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3783% 3784\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3785 \rm 3786 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3787 \parindent=0pt 3788 \tolerance=5000 3789 \ptexraggedright 3790} 3791 3792% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3793 3794\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3795\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3796 3797\parseargdef\title{% 3798 \checkenv\titlepage 3799 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3800 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3801 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3802 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3803} 3804 3805\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3806 \checkenv\titlepage 3807 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3808} 3809 3810% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3811% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3812% 3813\parseargdef\author{% 3814 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3815 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3816 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3817 \else 3818 \checkenv\titlepage 3819 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3820 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3821 \fi 3822} 3823 3824 3825% Set up page headings and footings. 3826 3827\let\thispage=\folio 3828 3829\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3830\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3831\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter 3832\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter 3833\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3834\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3835 3836% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3837\headline={{\textfonts\rm 3838 \ifchapterpage 3839 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi 3840 \else 3841 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi 3842 \fi}} 3843 3844\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3845 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3846\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3847 3848% Commands to set those variables. 3849% For example, this is what @headings on does 3850% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3851% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3852% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3853% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3854 3855 3856\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3857\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3858\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3859 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} 3860 \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline} 3861 3862\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3863\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3864\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3865 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3866 \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline} 3867 3868\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3869 3870\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3871\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3872\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3873\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3874 3875\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3876\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3877\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3878 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3879 % 3880 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3881 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3882 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3883 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3884} 3885 3886\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3887 3888% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3889% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3890% 3891% The same set of arguments for: 3892% 3893% @oddheadingmarks 3894% @evenfootingmarks 3895% @oddfootingmarks 3896% @everyheadingmarks 3897% @everyfootingmarks 3898 3899% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3900% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3901% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3902% 3903\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3904\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3905\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3906\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3907\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3908 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3909\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3910 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3911% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3912\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3913 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3914 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3915} 3916 3917\everyheadingmarks bottom 3918\everyfootingmarks bottom 3919 3920% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3921% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3922% @headings off turns them off. 3923% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3924% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3925% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3926% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3927% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3928% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3929 3930\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3931 3932\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3933 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}% 3934 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}% 3935} 3936 3937\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3938\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3939 3940% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3941\def\pageone{ 3942 \global\pageno=1 3943 \global\arabiccount = \pagecount 3944} 3945 3946% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3947% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3948% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3949% edge of all pages. 3950\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3951\pageone 3952\HEADINGSdoublex 3953} 3954\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3955 3956% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3957% page number on top right. 3958\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3959\pageone 3960\HEADINGSsinglex 3961} 3962\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3963 3964\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3965\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3966\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3967\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3968\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3969\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3970\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3971\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}} 3972\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3973\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3974} 3975 3976\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3977\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3978\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3979\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3980\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3981\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3982\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3983\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3984\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3985} 3986 3987% for @setchapternewpage off 3988\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{% 3989\pageone 3990\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3991\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3992\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3993\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3994\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline 3995\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline 3996\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3997} 3998 3999% Subroutines used in generating headings 4000% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 4001% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 4002% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 4003\ifx\today\thisisundefined 4004\def\today{% 4005 \number\day\space 4006 \ifcase\month 4007 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 4008 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 4009 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 4010 \fi 4011 \space\number\year} 4012\fi 4013 4014% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 4015% It generates no output of its own. 4016\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 4017\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 4018 4019 4020\message{tables,} 4021% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 4022 4023% default indentation of table text 4024\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 4025% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 4026\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 4027% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 4028\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 4029 4030% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 4031\newdimen\itemmax 4032 4033% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 4034% these defs. 4035% They also define \itemindex 4036% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 4037 4038\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 4039 4040\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 4041 4042\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 4043\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 4044 4045\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 4046 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 4047 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 4048 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 4049 \itemindex{#1}% 4050 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 4051 % 4052 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 4053 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 4054 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 4055 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 4056 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 4057 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 4058 % 4059 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 4060 % but leave it ragged-right. 4061 \begingroup 4062 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 4063 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 4064 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4065 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4066 \endgroup 4067 % 4068 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4069 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4070 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4071 % 4072 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4073 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4074 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4075 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4076 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4077 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4078 % 4079 \penalty 10001 4080 \endgroup 4081 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4082 \else 4083 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4084 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4085 \noindent 4086 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4087 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4088 % eventually be printed. 4089 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4090 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4091 \unhbox0 4092 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4093 \endgroup 4094 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4095 \fi 4096} 4097 4098\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4099\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4100 4101% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4102\envdef\table{% 4103 \let\itemindex\gobble 4104 \tablecheck{table}% 4105} 4106\envdef\ftable{% 4107 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4108 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4109} 4110\envdef\vtable{% 4111 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4112 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4113} 4114\def\tablecheck#1{% 4115 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4116 \endgroup 4117 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4118 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4119 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4120 \else 4121 \let\next\tablex 4122 \fi 4123 \next 4124} 4125\def\tablex#1{% 4126 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4127 \parsearg\tabley 4128} 4129\def\tabley#1{% 4130 {% 4131 \makevalueexpandable 4132 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4133 \expandafter 4134 }\temp \endtablez 4135} 4136\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4137 \aboveenvbreak 4138 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4139 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4140 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4141 \itemmax=\tableindent 4142 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4143 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4144 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4145 \parindent = 0pt 4146 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4147 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4148 \let\item = \internalBitem 4149 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4150} 4151\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4152\let\Eftable\Etable 4153\let\Evtable\Etable 4154\let\Eitemize\Etable 4155\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4156 4157% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4158 4159\newcount \itemno 4160 4161\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4162 4163\def\doitemize#1{% 4164 \aboveenvbreak 4165 \itemmax=\itemindent 4166 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4167 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4168 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4169 \parindent=0pt 4170 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4171 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4172 % 4173 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4174 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4175 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4176 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4177 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4178 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4179 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4180 % 4181 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4182 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4183 % 4184 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4185} 4186 4187% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4188% 4189\def\itemizeitem{% 4190 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4191 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4192 {% 4193 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4194 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4195 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4196 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4197 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4198 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4199 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4200 % that's the theory. 4201 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4202 \noindent 4203 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4204 % 4205 \ifinner\else 4206 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4207 \fi 4208 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4209 % @itemize looks awful there. 4210 }% 4211 \flushcr 4212} 4213 4214% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4215% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4216% 4217\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4218 4219% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4220% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4221% argument is the same as `1'. 4222% 4223\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4224\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4225 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4226 \def\thearg{#1}% 4227 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4228 % 4229 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4230 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4231 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4232 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4233 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4234 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4235 \ifx\rest\empty 4236 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4237 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4238 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4239 % not equal to itself. 4240 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4241 % 4242 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4243 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4244 % 4245 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4246 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4247 \else 4248 % It's a letter. 4249 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4250 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4251 \else 4252 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4253 \fi 4254 \fi 4255 \else 4256 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4257 \numericenumerate 4258 \fi 4259} 4260 4261% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4262% given in \thearg. 4263% 4264\def\numericenumerate{% 4265 \itemno = \thearg 4266 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4267} 4268 4269% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4270\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4271 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4272 \startenumeration{% 4273 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4274 \ifnum\itemno=0 4275 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4276 alphabet}% 4277 \fi 4278 \char\lccode\itemno 4279 }% 4280} 4281 4282% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4283\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4284 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4285 \startenumeration{% 4286 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4287 \ifnum\itemno=0 4288 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4289 alphabet} 4290 \fi 4291 \char\uccode\itemno 4292 }% 4293} 4294 4295% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4296% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4297% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4298% 4299\def\startenumeration#1{% 4300 \advance\itemno by -1 4301 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4302} 4303 4304 4305% @multitable macros 4306 4307% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4308% 4309\let\endsetuptable\relax 4310\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4311\let\columnfractions\relax 4312\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4313\newif\ifsetpercent 4314 4315% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4316% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4317% 4318\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4319 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4320 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4321 \setuptable 4322} 4323 4324\newcount\colcount 4325\def\setuptable#1{% 4326 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4327 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4328 \let\go = \relax 4329 \else 4330 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4331 \global\setpercenttrue 4332 \else 4333 \ifsetpercent 4334 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4335 \else 4336 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4337 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4338 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4339 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4340 \fi 4341 \fi 4342 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4343 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4344 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4345 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4346 \else 4347 \let\go = \setuptable 4348 \fi% 4349 \fi 4350 \go 4351} 4352 4353% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4354% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4355% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4356% undo it ourselves. 4357\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4358\def\headitem{% 4359 \checkenv\multitable 4360 \crcr 4361 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4362 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4363 \the\everytab % for the first item 4364}% 4365% 4366% default for tables with no headings. 4367\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4368% 4369\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4370 4371\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4372% 4373\envdef\multitable{% 4374 \vskip\parskip 4375 \startsavinginserts 4376 % 4377 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4378 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4379 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4380 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4381 \def\item{\crcr}% 4382 % 4383 \tolerance=9500 4384 \hbadness=9500 4385 \parskip=0pt 4386 \parindent=6pt 4387 \overfullrule=0pt 4388 \global\colcount=0 4389 % 4390 \everycr = {% 4391 \noalign{% 4392 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4393 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4394 % 4395 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4396 \checkinserts 4397 % 4398 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4399 \headitemcrhook 4400 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4401 }% 4402 }% 4403 % 4404 \parsearg\domultitable 4405} 4406\def\domultitable#1{% 4407 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4408 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4409 % 4410 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4411 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4412 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4413 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4414 \halign\bgroup &% 4415 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4416 \strut 4417 \vtop{% 4418 \advance\hsize by -1\leftskip 4419 % Find the correct column width 4420 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4421 % 4422 \rightskip=0pt 4423 \ifnum\colcount=1 4424 \advance\hsize by\leftskip % Add indent of surrounding text 4425 \else 4426 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other. 4427 \leftskip=12pt 4428 \ifsetpercent \else 4429 % If a template has been used 4430 \advance\hsize by \leftskip 4431 \fi 4432 \fi 4433 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\strut 4434 }\cr 4435} 4436\def\Emultitable{% 4437 \crcr 4438 \egroup % end the \halign 4439 \global\setpercentfalse 4440} 4441 4442 4443\message{conditionals,} 4444 4445% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4446% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4447% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4448% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4449% attempt to close an environment group. 4450% 4451\def\makecond#1{% 4452 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4453 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4454} 4455\makecond{iftex} 4456\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4457\makecond{ifnothtml} 4458\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4459\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4460\makecond{ifnotxml} 4461 4462% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4463% 4464\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4465\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4466\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4467\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4468\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4469\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4470\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4471\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4472\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4473\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4474\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4475\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4476\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4477 4478% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4479% 4480% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4481\newcount\doignorecount 4482 4483\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4484 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4485 \obeylines 4486 \catcode`\@ = \other 4487 \catcode`\{ = \other 4488 \catcode`\} = \other 4489 % 4490 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4491 \spaceisspace 4492 % 4493 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4494 \doignorecount = 0 4495 % 4496 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4497 \dodoignore{#1}% 4498} 4499 4500{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4501 \obeylines % 4502 % 4503 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4504 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4505 % 4506 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4507 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4508 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4509 % 4510 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4511 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4512 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4513 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4514 % 4515 % And now expand that command. 4516 \doignoretext ^^M% 4517 }% 4518} 4519 4520\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4521 \def\temp{#1}% 4522 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4523 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4524 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4525 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4526 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4527 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4528 \fi 4529 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4530} 4531 4532% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4533% 4534\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4535 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4536 \let\next\enddoignore 4537 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4538 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4539 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4540 \fi 4541 \next 4542} 4543 4544% Finish off ignored text. 4545{ \obeylines% 4546 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4547 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4548 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4549 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4550} 4551 4552 4553% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4554% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4555% 4556% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4557% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4558% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4559% didn't need it. 4560% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4561% 4562\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4563\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4564 {% 4565 \makevalueexpandable 4566 \def\temp{#2}% 4567 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4568 \ifx\temp\empty 4569 \next{}% 4570 \else 4571 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4572 \fi 4573 }% 4574} 4575% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4576\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4577 4578% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4579% 4580\parseargdef\clear{% 4581 {% 4582 \makevalueexpandable 4583 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4584 }% 4585} 4586 4587% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4588\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4589\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4590{ 4591 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4592 % 4593 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4594 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4595 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4596 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4597 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4598 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4599 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4600 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4601 } 4602} 4603 4604\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4605 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4606 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4607 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4608 \else 4609 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4610 \fi 4611} 4612 4613% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4614% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4615% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4616% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4617% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4618% 4619% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4620\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4621 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4622 \string\value{#1}% 4623 \else 4624 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4625 \fi 4626} 4627 4628% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4629% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4630\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4631 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4632 ZZZZZZZ% 4633 \else 4634 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4635 \fi 4636} 4637 4638% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4639% with @set. 4640% 4641% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4642% \makecond and then redefine. 4643% 4644\makecond{ifset} 4645\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4646\def\doifset#1#2{% 4647 {% 4648 \makevalueexpandable 4649 \let\next=\empty 4650 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4651 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4652 \fi 4653 \expandafter 4654 }\next 4655} 4656\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4657 4658% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4659% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4660% 4661% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4662% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4663% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4664% 4665\makecond{ifclear} 4666\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4667\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4668 4669% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4670% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4671% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4672% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4673% 4674\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4675\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4676% 4677\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4678 \makevalueexpandable 4679 \let\next=\empty 4680 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4681 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4682 \fi 4683 \expandafter 4684 }\next 4685} 4686\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4687 4688% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4689\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4690\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4691 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4692\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4693 4694% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4695% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4696\set txicommandconditionals 4697 4698% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4699% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4700\let\dircategory=\comment 4701 4702% @defininfoenclose. 4703\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4704 4705 4706\message{indexing,} 4707% Index generation facilities 4708 4709% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4710% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4711\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4712 4713% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4714% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4715% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4716% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4717% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4718% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4719% for the sake of vms. 4720% 4721\def\newindex#1{% 4722 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4723 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4724 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4725} 4726 4727% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4728% 4729\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4730 4731% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4732% 4733\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4734% 4735\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4736 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4737 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4738 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4739} 4740 4741% The default indices: 4742\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4743\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4744\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4745\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4746\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4747\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4748 4749 4750% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4751% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4752% 4753% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4754% inside @code. 4755% 4756\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4757\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4758 4759% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4760% #3 the target index (bar). 4761\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4762 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4763 % redefine \fooindfile: 4764 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4765 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4766 % redefine \fooindex: 4767 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4768} 4769 4770% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4771% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4772% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4773 4774\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4775\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4776 4777% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4778\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4779\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}} 4780 4781 4782% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo 4783% commands. 4784% 4785\def\atdummies{% 4786 \definedummyletter\@% 4787 \definedummyletter\ % 4788 \definedummyletter\{% 4789 \definedummyletter\}% 4790 \definedummyletter\&% 4791 % 4792 % Do the redefinitions. 4793 \definedummies 4794 \otherbackslash 4795} 4796 4797% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4798% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4799% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4800% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4801% from whatever follows. 4802% 4803% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4804% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4805% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4806% 4807% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4808% space. 4809% 4810\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4811\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4812\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4813 4814% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands. 4815% 4816\def\definedummies{% 4817 % 4818 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4819 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4820 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4821 \commondummiesnofonts 4822 % 4823 \definedummyletter\_% 4824 \definedummyletter\-% 4825 % 4826 % Non-English letters. 4827 \definedummyword\AA 4828 \definedummyword\AE 4829 \definedummyword\DH 4830 \definedummyword\L 4831 \definedummyword\O 4832 \definedummyword\OE 4833 \definedummyword\TH 4834 \definedummyword\aa 4835 \definedummyword\ae 4836 \definedummyword\dh 4837 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4838 \definedummyword\l 4839 \definedummyword\o 4840 \definedummyword\oe 4841 \definedummyword\ordf 4842 \definedummyword\ordm 4843 \definedummyword\questiondown 4844 \definedummyword\ss 4845 \definedummyword\th 4846 % 4847 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4848 \definedummyword\bf 4849 \definedummyword\gtr 4850 \definedummyword\hat 4851 \definedummyword\less 4852 \definedummyword\sf 4853 \definedummyword\sl 4854 \definedummyword\tclose 4855 \definedummyword\tt 4856 % 4857 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4858 \definedummyword\TeX 4859 % 4860 % Assorted special characters. 4861 \definedummyword\ampchar 4862 \definedummyword\atchar 4863 \definedummyword\arrow 4864 \definedummyword\backslashchar 4865 \definedummyword\bullet 4866 \definedummyword\comma 4867 \definedummyword\copyright 4868 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4869 \definedummyword\dots 4870 \definedummyword\enddots 4871 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4872 \definedummyword\equiv 4873 \definedummyword\error 4874 \definedummyword\euro 4875 \definedummyword\expansion 4876 \definedummyword\geq 4877 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4878 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4879 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4880 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4881 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4882 \definedummyword\leq 4883 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4884 \definedummyword\minus 4885 \definedummyword\ogonek 4886 \definedummyword\pounds 4887 \definedummyword\point 4888 \definedummyword\print 4889 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4890 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4891 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4892 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4893 \definedummyword\quoteright 4894 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4895 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4896 \definedummyword\result 4897 \definedummyword\sub 4898 \definedummyword\sup 4899 \definedummyword\textdegree 4900 % 4901 \definedummyword\subentry 4902 % 4903 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4904 \macrolist 4905 \let\value\dummyvalue 4906 % 4907 \normalturnoffactive 4908} 4909 4910% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4911% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 4912% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 4913% 4914\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4915 % Control letters and accents. 4916 \commondummyletter\!% 4917 \commondummyaccent\"% 4918 \commondummyaccent\'% 4919 \commondummyletter\*% 4920 \commondummyaccent\,% 4921 \commondummyletter\.% 4922 \commondummyletter\/% 4923 \commondummyletter\:% 4924 \commondummyaccent\=% 4925 \commondummyletter\?% 4926 \commondummyaccent\^% 4927 \commondummyaccent\`% 4928 \commondummyaccent\~% 4929 \commondummyword\u 4930 \commondummyword\v 4931 \commondummyword\H 4932 \commondummyword\dotaccent 4933 \commondummyword\ogonek 4934 \commondummyword\ringaccent 4935 \commondummyword\tieaccent 4936 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 4937 \commondummyword\udotaccent 4938 \commondummyword\dotless 4939 % 4940 % Texinfo font commands. 4941 \commondummyword\b 4942 \commondummyword\i 4943 \commondummyword\r 4944 \commondummyword\sansserif 4945 \commondummyword\sc 4946 \commondummyword\slanted 4947 \commondummyword\t 4948 % 4949 % Commands that take arguments. 4950 \commondummyword\abbr 4951 \commondummyword\acronym 4952 \commondummyword\anchor 4953 \commondummyword\cite 4954 \commondummyword\code 4955 \commondummyword\command 4956 \commondummyword\dfn 4957 \commondummyword\dmn 4958 \commondummyword\email 4959 \commondummyword\emph 4960 \commondummyword\env 4961 \commondummyword\file 4962 \commondummyword\image 4963 \commondummyword\indicateurl 4964 \commondummyword\inforef 4965 \commondummyword\kbd 4966 \commondummyword\key 4967 \commondummyword\math 4968 \commondummyword\option 4969 \commondummyword\pxref 4970 \commondummyword\ref 4971 \commondummyword\samp 4972 \commondummyword\strong 4973 \commondummyword\tie 4974 \commondummyword\U 4975 \commondummyword\uref 4976 \commondummyword\url 4977 \commondummyword\var 4978 \commondummyword\verb 4979 \commondummyword\w 4980 \commondummyword\xref 4981} 4982 4983\let\indexlbrace\relax 4984\let\indexrbrace\relax 4985\let\indexatchar\relax 4986\let\indexbackslash\relax 4987 4988{\catcode`\@=0 4989\catcode`\\=13 4990 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 4991} 4992 4993{ 4994\catcode`\<=13 4995\catcode`\-=13 4996\catcode`\`=13 4997 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 4998 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 4999 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5000 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5001 \let`=\empty 5002 \fi 5003 % 5004 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5005 \backslashdisappear 5006 \fi 5007 % 5008 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5009 \def-{}% 5010 \fi 5011 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5012 \def<{}% 5013 \fi 5014 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5015 \def\@{}% 5016 \fi 5017 } 5018 5019 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5020 \let-\normaldash 5021 \let<\normalless 5022 } 5023} 5024 5025 5026% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5027% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5028% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5029% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5030% 5031\def\indexnofonts{% 5032 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5033 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5034 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5035 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5036 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5037 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5038 \commondummiesnofonts 5039 % 5040 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5041 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5042 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5043 %\let\tt=\asis 5044 % 5045 \def\ { }% 5046 \def\@{@}% 5047 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5048 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5049 % 5050 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5051 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5052 \let\lbracechar\{% 5053 \let\rbracechar\}% 5054 % 5055 % Non-English letters. 5056 \def\AA{AA}% 5057 \def\AE{AE}% 5058 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5059 \def\L{L}% 5060 \def\OE{OE}% 5061 \def\O{O}% 5062 \def\TH{TH}% 5063 \def\aa{aa}% 5064 \def\ae{ae}% 5065 \def\dh{dzz}% 5066 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5067 \def\l{l}% 5068 \def\oe{oe}% 5069 \def\ordf{a}% 5070 \def\ordm{o}% 5071 \def\o{o}% 5072 \def\questiondown{?}% 5073 \def\ss{ss}% 5074 \def\th{th}% 5075 % 5076 \let\do\indexnofontsdef 5077 % 5078 \do\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5079 \do\TeX{TeX}% 5080 % 5081 % Assorted special characters. 5082 \do\atchar{@}% 5083 \do\arrow{->}% 5084 \do\bullet{bullet}% 5085 \do\comma{,}% 5086 \do\copyright{copyright}% 5087 \do\dots{...}% 5088 \do\enddots{...}% 5089 \do\equiv{==}% 5090 \do\error{error}% 5091 \do\euro{euro}% 5092 \do\expansion{==>}% 5093 \do\geq{>=}% 5094 \do\guillemetleft{<<}% 5095 \do\guillemetright{>>}% 5096 \do\guilsinglleft{<}% 5097 \do\guilsinglright{>}% 5098 \do\leq{<=}% 5099 \do\lbracechar{\{}% 5100 \do\minus{-}% 5101 \do\point{.}% 5102 \do\pounds{pounds}% 5103 \do\print{-|}% 5104 \do\quotedblbase{"}% 5105 \do\quotedblleft{"}% 5106 \do\quotedblright{"}% 5107 \do\quoteleft{`}% 5108 \do\quoteright{'}% 5109 \do\quotesinglbase{,}% 5110 \do\rbracechar{\}}% 5111 \do\registeredsymbol{R}% 5112 \do\result{=>}% 5113 \do\textdegree{o}% 5114 % 5115 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5116 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5117 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5118 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5119 % that starts with \. 5120 % 5121 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5122 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5123 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5124 % 5125 \macrolist 5126 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5127} 5128 5129% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows 5130% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA 5131\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}% 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5137\def\doind#1#2{% 5138 \iflinks 5139 {% 5140 % 5141 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5142 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5143 % 5144 \def\indextext{#2}% 5145 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5146 }% 5147 \fi 5148} 5149 5150% Same as \doind, but for code indices 5151\def\docind#1#2{% 5152 \iflinks 5153 {% 5154 % 5155 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5156 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5157 % 5158 \def\indextext{#2}% 5159 \safewhatsit\docindwrite 5160 }% 5161 \fi 5162} 5163 5164% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5165\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5166\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5167 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5168 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5169 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5170 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5171 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5172 % Open the file 5173 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5174 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5175 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5176 % preceding skips. 5177 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5178\fi} 5179\def\indexisfl{fl} 5180 5181% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5182{ 5183\catcode`\-=13 5184\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5185 \begingroup 5186 \indexnonalnumreappear 5187 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5188\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5189 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5190} 5191 5192\def\indexwriteseealso#1{ 5193 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}% 5194} 5195\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{ 5196 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}% 5197} 5198 5199% The default definitions 5200\def\sortas#1{}% 5201\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5202\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also} 5203\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5204 5205 5206% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5207% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5208% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5209% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext 5210% 5211\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5212 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5213 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5214 \def\sep{}% 5215 \def\seealso##1{}% 5216 \def\seeentry##1{}% 5217 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5218} 5219 5220% append the results from the next segment 5221\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5222 \def\segment{#1}% 5223 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5224 \else 5225 % 5226 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5227 % trim spaces. 5228 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5229 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5230 \ifincodeindex 5231 \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}% 5232 \fi 5233 % 5234 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5235 % 5236 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5237 % font commands turned off. 5238 \bgroup 5239 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5240 \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso 5241 \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry 5242 \indexnofonts 5243 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5244 \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}% 5245 \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}% 5246 \let\{=\lbracechar 5247 \let\}=\rbracechar 5248 \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}% 5249 \def\atchar##1{\@}% 5250 \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}% 5251 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}% 5252 % 5253 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5254 \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty 5255 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5256 % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment. 5257 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5258 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5259 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5260 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5261 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5262 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5263 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5264 }\fi 5265 % 5266 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5267 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5268 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5269 \tmp 5270 \egroup 5271 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5272 % 5273 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5274 \fi 5275} 5276\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5277\newbox\dummybox % used above 5278 5279\let\subentry\relax 5280 5281% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex. 5282% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux 5283% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses 5284% the current value of \escapechar. 5285\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\} 5286 5287% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape 5288% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When 5289% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then 5290% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy 5291% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in 5292% index files, never standing for themselves. 5293% 5294\set txiindexescapeisbackslash 5295 5296% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file. 5297% 5298 5299\newif\ifincodeindex 5300\def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex} 5301\def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex} 5302 5303\def\doindwritex{% 5304 \maybemarginindex 5305 % 5306 \atdummies 5307 % 5308 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else 5309 \escapeisbackslash 5310 \fi 5311 % 5312 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 5313 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 5314 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 5315 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}% 5316 % 5317 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5318 % sort key. 5319 \splitindexentry\indextext 5320 % 5321 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5322 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5323 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5324 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5325 % sorted result. 5326 % 5327 \edef\temp{% 5328 \write\writeto{% 5329 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}% 5330 {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}% 5331 \bracedtext}% 5332 }% 5333 \temp 5334} 5335 5336% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented). 5337\def\maybemarginindex{% 5338 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5339 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}% 5340 \fi 5341} 5342\let\SETmarginindex=\relax 5343 5344 5345% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5346% 5347% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5348% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5349% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5350% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5351% sequences like this: 5352% @end defun 5353% @tindex whatever 5354% @defun ... 5355% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5356% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5357% the previous defun. 5358% 5359% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5360% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5361% 5362% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5363% 5364% But wait, there is a catch there: 5365% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5366% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5367% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5368% representation of the skip. 5369% 5370% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5371% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5372% 5373\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5374% 5375\newskip\whatsitskip 5376\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5377% 5378% ..., ready, GO: 5379% 5380\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5381 #1% 5382 \else 5383 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5384 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5385 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5386 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5387 % 5388 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5389 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5390 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5391 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5392 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5393 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5394 \else 5395 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5396 \fi 5397 % 5398 #1% 5399 % 5400 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5401 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5402 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5403 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5404 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5405 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5406 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5407 % @vindex index-whatever 5408 % Description. 5409 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5410 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5411 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5412 \else 5413 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5414 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5415 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5416 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5417 \fi 5418\fi} 5419 5420% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5421% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5422% or 5423% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5424% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5425% containing these kinds of lines: 5426% \initial {c} 5427% before the first topic whose initial is c 5428% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5429% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5430% \primary {topic} 5431% \entry {topic}{} 5432% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5433% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5434% for each subtopic. 5435% \secondary {subtopic}{} 5436% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics 5437% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist} 5438% for each sub-subtopic. 5439 5440% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5441% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5442 5443\def\findex {\fnindex} 5444\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5445\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5446\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5447\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5448\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5449 5450% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5451 5452% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5453% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5454% 5455\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5456 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5457 % 5458 \smallfonts \rm 5459 \tolerance = 9500 5460 \plainfrenchspacing 5461 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5462 % 5463 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5464 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5465 % 5466 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5467 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5468 \ifeof 1 5469 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5470 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5471 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5472 % there is some text. 5473 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5474 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5475 \else 5476 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5477 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5478 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5479 \read 1 to \thisline 5480 \ifeof 1 5481 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5482 \else 5483 \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish% 5484 \fi 5485 \fi 5486 \closein 1 5487\endgroup} 5488 5489% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index 5490% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have 5491% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would 5492% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error. 5493\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{% 5494 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax 5495 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1 5496 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax 5497\errmessage{% 5498ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped. 5499To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi' 5500or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>. 5501If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo 5502distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0). 5503You may be able to typeset the index if you run 5504'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself. 5505You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by 5506running a command like 5507'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do 5508this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format. 5509If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again 5510might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')% 5511}% 5512 \else 5513 (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format) 5514 \fi 5515 \else 5516 \begindoublecolumns 5517 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5518 \enddoublecolumns 5519 \fi 5520 \else 5521 \begindoublecolumns 5522 \catcode`\\=0\relax 5523 % 5524 % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This 5525 % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files. 5526 %\catcode`\@=12\relax 5527 \catcode`\@=0\relax 5528 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5529 \enddoublecolumns 5530 \fi 5531} 5532 5533% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5534% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5535 5536{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5537\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5538\catcode`\$=3 5539\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5540 % special control sequences used in the index sort key 5541 \let\indexlbrace\{% 5542 \let\indexrbrace\}% 5543 \let\indexatchar\@% 5544 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5545 % 5546 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5547 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5548 % for these characters. 5549 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}} 5550 % 5551 % In case @\ is used for backslash 5552 \uppercase{\let\\=~} 5553 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5554 \catcode`\/=13 5555 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5556 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5557 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5558 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5559 \def\_{% 5560 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5561 \def|{$\vert$}% 5562 \def<{$\less$}% 5563 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5564 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5565}} 5566 5567\def\initial{% 5568 \bgroup 5569 \initialglyphs 5570 \initialx 5571} 5572 5573\def\initialx#1{% 5574 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5575 \removelastskip 5576 % 5577 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5578 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5579 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5580 \nobreak 5581 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5582 \penalty -300 5583 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5584 % 5585 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5586 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5587 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5588 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5589 % 5590 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5591 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5592 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5593 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5594 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5595 % \leftline creates. 5596 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5597 \nobreak 5598 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5599 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5600} 5601 5602\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5603\entryrightmargin=0pt 5604 5605% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5606% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5607% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5608% 5609\def\entry{% 5610 \begingroup 5611 % 5612 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5613 % affect previous text. 5614 \par 5615 % 5616 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5617 \parskip = 0in 5618 % 5619 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5620 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5621 % titles, for instance. 5622 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5623 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5624 % 5625 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5626 \afterassignment\doentry 5627 \let\temp = 5628} 5629\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5630\def\doentry{% 5631 % Save the text of the entry 5632 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5633 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5634 \noindent 5635 \aftergroup\finishentry 5636 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5637 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5638 % with catcodes occurring. 5639} 5640{\catcode`\@=11 5641\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5642 \egroup % end box A 5643 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5644 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5645 \unhbox\boxA 5646 % #1 is the page number. 5647 % 5648 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5649 % leaders if they are present. 5650 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5651 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5652 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5653 \else 5654 % 5655 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5656 % 5657 \ifpdforxetex 5658 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5659 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5660 \else 5661 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5662 \fi 5663 \fi 5664 \egroup % end \boxA 5665 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5666 \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par 5667 \nobreak 5668 \else\bgroup 5669 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5670 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5671 % 5672 \parindent = 0pt 5673 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5674 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5675 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5676 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5677 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5678 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5679 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5680 % 5681 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5682 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5683 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5684 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5685 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5686 \dimen@i=2.1em 5687 \else 5688 \dimen@i=0em 5689 \fi 5690 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5691 % 5692 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5693 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5694 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5695 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5696 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5697 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5698 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5699 % the first line. 5700 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5701 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5702 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5703 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5704 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5705 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5706 \fi 5707 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5708 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5709 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5710 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5711 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5712 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5713 % 5714 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5715 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5716 \advance\parindent by -1em 5717 \fi\fi 5718 \indent % start paragraph 5719 \unhbox\boxA 5720 % 5721 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5722 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5723 % 5724 % Word spacing - no stretch 5725 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5726 % 5727 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5728 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5729 % 5730 \par % format the paragraph 5731 \egroup % The \vbox 5732 \fi 5733 \endgroup 5734}} 5735 5736\newskip\thinshrinkable 5737\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5738 5739% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5740% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5741% the page number to the right. 5742\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5743 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5744 5745 5746\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5747 5748\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}} 5749\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}} 5750 5751\def\indententry#1#2#3{% 5752 \bgroup 5753 \leftskip=#1 5754 \entry{#2}{#3}% 5755 \egroup 5756} 5757 5758% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5759% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5760% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5761\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5762 5763\newbox\partialpage 5764\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5765 5766\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5767 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5768 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5769 % 5770 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5771 \output = {% 5772 \savetopmark 5773 % 5774 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5775 % Unvbox the main output page. 5776 \unvbox\PAGE 5777 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5778 }% 5779 }% 5780 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5781 % 5782 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5783 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5784 % 5785 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5786 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5787 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5788 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5789 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5790 % 5791 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5792 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5793 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5794 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5795 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5796 % 5797 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5798 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5799 % been clobbered. 5800 % 5801 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5802 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5803 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5804 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5805 % 5806 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5807 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5808 % previous page. 5809 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5810 \vsize = 2\vsize 5811 % 5812 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5813 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5814} 5815 5816% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5817% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5818% 5819\def\doublecolumnout{% 5820 % 5821 \savetopmark 5822 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5823 \dimen@ = \vsize 5824 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5825 % 5826 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5827 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5828 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5829 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5830 \unvbox\PAGE 5831 \penalty\outputpenalty 5832} 5833% 5834% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5835% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5836\def\pagesofar{% 5837 \unvbox\partialpage 5838 % 5839 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5840 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5841 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5842} 5843 5844 5845% Finished with double columns. 5846\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5847 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5848 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5849 % following situation: 5850 % 5851 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5852 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5853 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5854 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5855 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5856 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5857 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5858 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5859 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5860 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5861 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5862 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5863 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5864 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5865 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5866 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5867 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5868 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5869 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5870 % 5871 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5872 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5873 \penalty0 5874 % 5875 \output = {% 5876 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5877 \savetopmark 5878 \balancecolumns 5879 }% 5880 \eject % call the \output just set 5881 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5882 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5883 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5884 % definition right away. 5885 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 5886 % 5887 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5888 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5889 % page break. 5890 \box\balancedcolumns 5891 % 5892 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5893 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5894 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5895 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5896 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5897 \else 5898 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5899 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5900 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5901 \fi 5902} 5903\newbox\balancedcolumns 5904\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5905% 5906% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5907% does the others. 5908\def\balancecolumns{% 5909 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5910 \dimen@ = \ht0 5911 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 5912 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5913 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5914 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5915 \else 5916 % double the leading vertical space 5917 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5918 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5919 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5920 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5921 \splittopskip = \topskip 5922 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 5923 {% 5924 \vbadness = 10000 5925 \loop 5926 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5927 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5928 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 5929 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5930 \repeat 5931 }% 5932 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 5933 % 5934 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 5935 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 5936 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 5937 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 5938 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 5939 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 5940 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 5941 \doublecolumnout 5942 \else 5943 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 5944 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 5945 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 5946 % flush with each other. 5947 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 5948 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 5949 \else 5950 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 5951 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 5952 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 5953 \fi 5954 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5955 \fi 5956 \fi 5957 % 5958} 5959\catcode`\@ = \other 5960 5961 5962\message{sectioning,} 5963% Chapters, sections, etc. 5964 5965% Let's start with @part. 5966\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5967\def\partzzz#1{% 5968 \chapoddpage 5969 \null 5970 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5971 \begingroup 5972 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 5973 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5974 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5975 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5976 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 5977 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 5978 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 5979 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5980 \chapoddpage 5981 \endgroup 5982} 5983 5984% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5985% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5986% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5987% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5988% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5989\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5990\newcount\chapno 5991\newcount\secno \secno=0 5992\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5993\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5994 5995% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5996\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 5997% 5998% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 5999% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6000% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6001% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6002% 6003\def\appendixletter{% 6004 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6005 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6006 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6007 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6008 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6009 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6010 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6011 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6012 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6013 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6014 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6015 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6016 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6017 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6018 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6019 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6020 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6021 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6022 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6023 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6024 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6025 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6026 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6027 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6028 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6029 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6030 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6031 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6032 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6033 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6034 \else\char\the\appendixno 6035 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6036 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6037 6038% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6039% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6040% these. @section does likewise. 6041\def\thischapter{} 6042\def\thischapternum{} 6043\def\thischaptername{} 6044\def\thissection{} 6045\def\thissectionnum{} 6046\def\thissectionname{} 6047 6048\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6049\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6050 6051% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6052\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6053 6054% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6055\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6056 6057% we only have subsub. 6058\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6059% 6060% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6061% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6062\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6063% 6064% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6065% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6066\def\chapheadtype{N} 6067 6068% Choose a heading macro 6069% #1 is heading type 6070% #2 is heading level 6071% #3 is text for heading 6072\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6073 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6074 \absseclevel=#2 6075 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6076 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6077 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6078 \absseclevel = 0 6079 \else 6080 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6081 \absseclevel = 3 6082 \fi 6083 \fi 6084 % The heading type: 6085 \def\headtype{#1}% 6086 \if \headtype U% 6087 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6088 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6089 \fi 6090 \else 6091 % Check for appendix sections: 6092 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6093 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6094 \else 6095 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6096 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6097 \fi\fi 6098 \fi 6099 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6100 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6101 \def\headtype{U}% 6102 \else 6103 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6104 \fi 6105 \fi 6106 % Now print the heading: 6107 \if \headtype U% 6108 \ifcase\absseclevel 6109 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6110 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6111 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6112 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6113 \fi 6114 \else 6115 \if \headtype A% 6116 \ifcase\absseclevel 6117 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6118 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6119 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6120 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6121 \fi 6122 \else 6123 \ifcase\absseclevel 6124 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6125 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6126 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6127 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6128 \fi 6129 \fi 6130 \fi 6131 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6132} 6133 6134% an interface: 6135\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6136\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6137\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6138 6139% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6140% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6141% 6142% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6143% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6144\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6145% 6146\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6147\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6148 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6149 % as an @include file. 6150 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6151 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6152 % 6153 % Used for \float. 6154 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6155 \resetallfloatnos 6156 % 6157 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6158 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6159 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6160 % 6161 % Write the actual heading. 6162 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6163 % 6164 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6165 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6166 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6167 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6168} 6169 6170\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6171% 6172\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6173 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6174 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6175 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6176 \resetallfloatnos 6177 % 6178 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6179 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6180 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6181 % 6182 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6183 % 6184 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6185 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6186 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6187} 6188 6189% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6190\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6191\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6192 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6193 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6194 % 6195 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6196 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6197 \resetallfloatnos 6198 % 6199 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6200 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6201 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6202 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6203 % to be executed, not expanded). 6204 % 6205 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6206 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6207 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6208 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6209 % the toc entries.) 6210 \toks0 = {#1}% 6211 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6212 % 6213 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6214 % 6215 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6216 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6217 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6218} 6219 6220% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6221\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6222 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6223 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6224 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6225} 6226 6227% @top is like @unnumbered. 6228\let\top\unnumbered 6229 6230% Sections. 6231% 6232\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6233\def\seczzz#1{% 6234 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6235 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6236} 6237 6238% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6239\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6240\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6241 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6242 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6243} 6244\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6245 6246% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6247\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6248\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6249 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6250 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6251} 6252 6253% Subsections. 6254% 6255% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6256\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6257\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6258 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6259 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6260} 6261 6262% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6263\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6264\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6265 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6266 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6267 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6268} 6269 6270% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6271\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6272\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6273 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6274 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6275 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6276} 6277 6278% Subsubsections. 6279% 6280% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6281\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6282\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6283 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6284 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6285 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6286} 6287 6288% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6289\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6290\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6291 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6292 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6293 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6294} 6295 6296% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6297\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6298\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6299 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6300 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6301 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6302} 6303 6304% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6305% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6306% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6307\let\section = \numberedsec 6308\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6309\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6310 6311% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6312 6313\def\majorheading{% 6314 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6315 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6316} 6317 6318\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6319\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6320 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6321 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6322 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6323} 6324 6325% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6326\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6327 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6328\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6329 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6330\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6331 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6332 6333% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6334% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6335% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6336 6337% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6338\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6339 6340% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6341\newskip\chapheadingskip 6342 6343% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6344\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6345 6346% Start a new page 6347\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6348 6349% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6350% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6351% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6352% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6353\def\chapoddpage{% 6354 \chappager 6355 \ifodd\pageno \else 6356 \begingroup 6357 \headingsoff 6358 \null 6359 \chappager 6360 \endgroup 6361 \fi 6362} 6363 6364\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6365 6366\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6367\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6368\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6369\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}} 6370 6371\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6372\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6373\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6374\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6375 6376\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6377\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6378\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6379\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6380 6381\CHAPPAGon 6382 6383% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6384% 6385% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6386% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6387% Not used for @heading series. 6388% 6389% To test against our argument. 6390\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6391\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6392\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6393% 6394\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6395 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6396 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6397 \fi 6398 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6399 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6400 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6401 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6402 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6403 % 6404 \def\temptype{#2}% 6405 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6406 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6407 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6408 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6409 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6410 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6411 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6412 \toks0={#1}% 6413 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6414 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6415 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6416 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6417 % commands in some of the translations. 6418 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6419 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6420 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6421 }% 6422 \else 6423 \toks0={#1}% 6424 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6425 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6426 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6427 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6428 % commands in some of the translations. 6429 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6430 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6431 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6432 }% 6433 \fi\fi\fi 6434 % 6435 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6436 % the preceding space. 6437 \safewhatsit\domark 6438 % 6439 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6440 \pchapsepmacro 6441 % 6442 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6443 % between here and the heading. 6444 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6445 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6446 \domark 6447 % 6448 {% 6449 \chapfonts \rm 6450 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6451 % 6452 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6453 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6454 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6455 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6456 % 6457 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6458 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6459 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6460 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6461 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6462 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6463 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6464 \def\toctype{omit}% 6465 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6466 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6467 \def\toctype{app}% 6468 \else 6469 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6470 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6471 \fi\fi\fi 6472 % 6473 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6474 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6475 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6476 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6477 % 6478 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6479 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6480 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6481 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6482 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6483 \donoderef{#2}% 6484 % 6485 % Typeset the actual heading. 6486 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6487 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6488 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6489 }% 6490 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6491 \nobreak 6492} 6493 6494% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6495\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6496\def\centerparameters{% 6497 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6498 \leftskip = \rightskip 6499 \parfillskip = 0pt 6500} 6501 6502 6503% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6504% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6505% 6506\newskip\secheadingskip 6507\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6508 6509% Subsection titles. 6510\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6511\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6512 6513% Subsubsection titles. 6514\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6515\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6516 6517 6518% Print any size, any type, section title. 6519% 6520% #1 is the text of the title, 6521% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6522% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6523% #4 is the section number. 6524% 6525\def\seckeyword{sec} 6526% 6527\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6528 {% 6529 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6530 \def\temptype{#3}% 6531 % 6532 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6533 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6534 % dubious), but not the others. 6535 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6536 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6537 \fi 6538 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6539 % 6540 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6541 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6542 % 6543 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6544 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6545 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6546 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6547 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6548 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6549 \fi 6550 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6551 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6552 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6553 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6554 \toks0={#1}% 6555 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6556 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6557 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6558 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6559 % commands in some of the translations. 6560 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6561 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6562 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6563 }% 6564 \fi 6565 \else 6566 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6567 \toks0={#1}% 6568 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6569 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6570 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6571 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6572 % commands in some of the translations. 6573 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6574 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6575 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6576 }% 6577 \fi 6578 \fi\fi\fi 6579 % 6580 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6581 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6582 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6583 \par 6584 % 6585 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6586 % the preceding space. 6587 \safewhatsit\domark 6588 % 6589 % Insert space above the heading. 6590 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6591 % 6592 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6593 % between here and the heading. 6594 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6595 \domark 6596 % 6597 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6598 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6599 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6600 \def\toctype{unn}% 6601 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6602 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6603 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6604 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6605 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6606 \def\toctype{omit}% 6607 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6608 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6609 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6610 \def\toctype{app}% 6611 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6612 \else 6613 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6614 \def\toctype{num}% 6615 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6616 \fi\fi\fi 6617 % 6618 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6619 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6620 % 6621 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6622 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6623 \donoderef{#3}% 6624 % 6625 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6626 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6627 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6628 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6629 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6630 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6631 \nobreak 6632 % 6633 % Output the actual section heading. 6634 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6635 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6636 \unhbox0 #1}% 6637 }% 6638 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6639 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6640 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6641 % 6642 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6643 % was followed by glue. 6644 \nobreak 6645 % 6646 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6647 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6648 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6649 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6650 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6651 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6652 \vskip-\parskip 6653 % 6654 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6655 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6656 % and do the needful. 6657 \penalty 10001 6658} 6659 6660 6661\message{toc,} 6662% Table of contents. 6663\newwrite\tocfile 6664 6665% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6666% Called from @chapter, etc. 6667% 6668% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6669% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6670% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6671% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6672% destination to jump to. 6673% 6674% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6675% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6676% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6677% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6678% 6679\newif\iftocfileopened 6680\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6681% 6682\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6683 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6684 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6685 \iftocfileopened\else 6686 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6687 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6688 \fi 6689 % 6690 \iflinks 6691 {\atdummies 6692 \edef\temp{% 6693 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6694 \temp 6695 }% 6696 \fi 6697 \fi 6698 % 6699 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6700 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6701 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6702 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6703 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6704 % `1', and two named `2'. 6705 \ifpdforxetex 6706 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6707 \fi 6708} 6709 6710 6711% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6712% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6713% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6714% 6715\def\activecatcodes{% 6716 \catcode`\"=\active 6717 \catcode`\$=\active 6718 \catcode`\<=\active 6719 \catcode`\>=\active 6720 \catcode`\\=\active 6721 \catcode`\^=\active 6722 \catcode`\_=\active 6723 \catcode`\|=\active 6724 \catcode`\~=\active 6725} 6726 6727 6728% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6729\def\readtocfile{% 6730 \setupdatafile 6731 \activecatcodes 6732 \input \tocreadfilename 6733} 6734 6735\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6736\newcount\savepageno 6737\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6738 6739% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6740% 6741\def\startcontents#1{% 6742 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6743 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. 6744 \contentsalignmacro 6745 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6746 % 6747 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6748 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6749 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6750 % 6751 \savepageno = \pageno 6752 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6753 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6754 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6755 % 6756 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6757 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6758 \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings 6759 % Record where the Roman numerals started. 6760 \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi 6761} 6762 6763% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6764% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6765% 6766\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6767 6768% Normal (long) toc. 6769% 6770\def\contents{% 6771 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6772 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6773 \ifeof 1 \else 6774 \readtocfile 6775 \fi 6776 \vfill \eject 6777 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6778 \ifeof 1 \else 6779 \pdfmakeoutlines 6780 \fi 6781 \closein 1 6782 \endgroup 6783 \contentsendroman 6784} 6785 6786% And just the chapters. 6787\def\summarycontents{% 6788 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6789 % 6790 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6791 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6792 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6793 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6794 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6795 \secfonts 6796 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6797 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6798 \rm 6799 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6800 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6801 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6802 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6803 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6804 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6805 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6806 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6807 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6808 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6809 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6810 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6811 \ifeof 1 \else 6812 \readtocfile 6813 \fi 6814 \closein 1 6815 \vfill \eject 6816 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6817 \endgroup 6818 \contentsendroman 6819} 6820\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6821 6822% Get ready to use Arabic numerals again 6823\def\contentsendroman{% 6824 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6825 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6826 % 6827 % If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the 6828 % document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for 6829 % the page numbers. 6830 \ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi 6831} 6832 6833% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6834% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6835% 6836\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6837 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6838 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6839 % But use \hss just in case. 6840 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6841 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6842 % 6843 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6844 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6845 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6846 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6847 % there are before deciding ... 6848 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6849} 6850 6851% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6852% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6853% The last argument is the page number. 6854% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6855 6856% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6857% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6858% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6859\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6860\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6861 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6862 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6863 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6864 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6865 \penalty-300 6866 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6867 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6868} 6869% 6870% Parts, in the short toc. 6871\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6872 \penalty-300 6873 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6874 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6875} 6876 6877% Chapters, in the main contents. 6878\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6879 6880% Chapters, in the short toc. 6881% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6882\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6883 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6884} 6885 6886% Appendices, in the main contents. 6887% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6888% 6889\def\appendixbox#1{% 6890 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6891 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6892 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6893% 6894\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6895 6896% Unnumbered chapters. 6897\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6898\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6899 6900% Sections. 6901\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6902\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6903\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6904 6905% Subsections. 6906\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6907\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6908\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6909 6910% And subsubsections. 6911\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6912\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6913\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6914 6915% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6916% Same as \defaultparindent. 6917\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6918 6919% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6920% page number. 6921% 6922% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6923% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6924\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6925 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6926 \begingroup 6927 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 6928 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 6929 \chapentryfonts 6930 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6931 \endgroup 6932 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6933} 6934 6935\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6936 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6937 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6938\endgroup} 6939 6940\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6941 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6942 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6943\endgroup} 6944 6945\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6946 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6947 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6948\endgroup} 6949 6950% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6951\let\tocentry = \entry 6952 6953% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6954\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6955 6956\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6957\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6958 6959\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6960\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6961\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6962\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6963 6964 6965\message{environments,} 6966% @foo ... @end foo. 6967 6968% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6969% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6970% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6971 6972\envdef\tex{% 6973 \setregularquotes 6974 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6975 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6976 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6977 \catcode `\%=14 6978 \catcode `\+=\other 6979 \catcode `\"=\other 6980 \catcode `\|=\other 6981 \catcode `\<=\other 6982 \catcode `\>=\other 6983 \catcode `\`=\other 6984 \catcode `\'=\other 6985 % 6986 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6987 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6988 \mathactive 6989 % 6990 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 6991 \let\b=\ptexb 6992 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6993 \let\c=\ptexc 6994 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6995 \let\.=\ptexdot 6996 \let\dots=\ptexdots 6997 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 6998 \let\!=\ptexexclam 6999 \let\i=\ptexi 7000 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7001 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7002 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7003 \let\+=\tabalign 7004 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7005 \let\/=\ptexslash 7006 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7007 \let\*=\ptexstar 7008 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7009 \let\t=\ptext 7010 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7011 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7012 % 7013 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7014 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7015 \def\@{@}% 7016} 7017% There is no need to define \Etex. 7018 7019% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7020% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7021% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7022 7023% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7024\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7025 7026% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7027% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7028% have any width. 7029\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7030 7031% This space is always present above and below environments. 7032\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7033 7034% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7035% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7036% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7037% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7038% 7039\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7040 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7041 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7042 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7043 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7044 \endgraf 7045 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7046 \removelastskip 7047 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7048 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7049 % often leads into it. 7050 \penalty100 7051 \fi 7052 \vskip\envskipamount 7053 \fi 7054 \fi 7055}} 7056 7057\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7058 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7059 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7060 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7061 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7062 \endgraf 7063 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7064 \removelastskip 7065 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7066 % or better ... 7067 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7068 \vskip\envskipamount 7069 \fi 7070 \fi 7071}} 7072 7073% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7074% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7075\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7076 7077% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7078% environment contents. 7079 7080% 7081\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7082\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7083\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7084\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7085\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7086 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7087 \hskip\rskip}} 7088\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7089 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7090 \hskip\rskip}} 7091% 7092\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7093 7094% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used 7095\def\cartouchefontdefs{% 7096 \font\circle=lcircle10\relax 7097 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7098} 7099\newdimen\circthick 7100\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7101\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7102 7103 7104\envdef\cartouche{% 7105 \cartouchefontdefs 7106 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7107 \startsavinginserts 7108 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7109 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7110 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7111 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7112 \cartouter=\hsize 7113 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7114 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7115 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7116 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7117 % 7118 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7119 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7120 % collide with the section heading. 7121 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7122 % 7123 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7124 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7125 \carttop 7126 \hbox\bgroup 7127 \hskip\lskip 7128 \vrule\kern3pt 7129 \vbox\bgroup 7130 \kern3pt 7131 \hsize=\cartinner 7132 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7133 \lineskip=\normlskip 7134 \parskip=\normpskip 7135 \vskip -\parskip 7136 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7137} 7138\def\Ecartouche{% 7139 \ifhmode\par\fi 7140 \kern3pt 7141 \egroup 7142 \kern3pt\vrule 7143 \hskip\rskip 7144 \egroup 7145 \cartbot 7146 \egroup 7147 \addgroupbox 7148 \checkinserts 7149} 7150 7151 7152% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7153% inside a group. 7154\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7155\def\nonfillstart{% 7156 \aboveenvbreak 7157 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7158 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7159 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7160 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7161 \parskip = 0pt 7162 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7163 % the normal \indent. 7164 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7165 \parindent = 0pt 7166 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7167 % 7168 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7169 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7170 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7171 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7172 \else 7173 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7174 \fi 7175 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7176} 7177 7178\begingroup 7179\obeyspaces 7180% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7181% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7182% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7183% @indent. 7184\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7185\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7186\ifx\temp % 7187\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7188\else% 7189\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7190\fi% 7191}% 7192\endgroup 7193\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7194\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7195 7196% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7197% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7198% This affects the following displayed environments: 7199% @example, @display, @format, @lisp, @verbatim 7200% 7201\def\smallword{small} 7202\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7203\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7204\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7205 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7206 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7207 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7208 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7209 % to change the fonts afterward. 7210 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7211 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7212 \fi 7213} 7214\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7215 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7216 \else 7217 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7218 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7219 \fi 7220} 7221 7222% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7223% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7224\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7225 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7226 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7227 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7228 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7229} 7230 7231% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7232\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7233 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7234 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7235} 7236% 7237% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7238% @example: same as @lisp. 7239% 7240% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7241% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7242% 7243\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7244 \nonfillstart 7245 \tt\setcodequotes 7246 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7247 \parsearg\gobble 7248} 7249% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7250% 7251\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7252 \nonfillstart 7253 \gobble 7254} 7255 7256% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7257% 7258\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7259 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7260 \nonfillstart 7261 \gobble 7262} 7263 7264% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7265\envdef\flushleft{% 7266 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7267 \nonfillstart 7268 \gobble 7269} 7270\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7271 7272% @flushright. 7273% 7274\envdef\flushright{% 7275 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7276 \nonfillstart 7277 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7278 \gobble 7279} 7280\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7281 7282 7283% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7284% justification. From plain.tex. 7285\envdef\raggedright{% 7286 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7287} 7288\let\Eraggedright\par 7289 7290\envdef\raggedleft{% 7291 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7292 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7293 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7294 % badness reporting. 7295} 7296\let\Eraggedleft\par 7297 7298\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7299 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7300 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7301 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7302 % badness reporting. 7303} 7304\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7305 7306 7307% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7308% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7309% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7310% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7311% 7312\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7313% 7314\def\quotationstart{% 7315 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7316 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7317 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7318 \fi 7319 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7320} 7321 7322% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7323% doing normal filling. 7324% 7325\def\Equotation{% 7326 \par 7327 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7328 % indent a bit. 7329 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7330 \fi 7331 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7332} 7333\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7334 7335% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7336\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7337 \def\temp{#1}% 7338 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7339 {\bf #1: }% 7340 \fi 7341} 7342 7343% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7344% has no optional argument. 7345% 7346\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7347% 7348\def\indentedblockstart{% 7349 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7350 \parindent=0pt 7351 % 7352 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7353 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7354 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7355 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7356 \else 7357 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7358 \fi 7359} 7360 7361% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7362% 7363\def\Eindentedblock{% 7364 \par 7365 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7366} 7367\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7368 7369 7370% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7371% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7372% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7373% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7374% 7375% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7376% 7377% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7378% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7379% verbatim line. 7380\def\dospecials{% 7381 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7382 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7383 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7384 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7385 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7386 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7387 %\do\`\do\'% 7388} 7389% 7390% [Knuth] p. 380 7391\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7392 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7393% 7394% Setup for the @verb command. 7395% 7396% Eight spaces for a tab 7397\begingroup 7398 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7399 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7400\endgroup 7401% 7402\def\setupverb{% 7403 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7404 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7405 \setcodequotes 7406 \tabeightspaces 7407 % Respect line breaks, 7408 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7409 % make each space count 7410 % must do in this order: 7411 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7412} 7413 7414% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7415% 7416% Real tab expansion. 7417\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7418% 7419% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7420% tabs. 7421\newbox\verbbox 7422\def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7423% 7424\begingroup 7425 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7426 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7427 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7428 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7429 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7430 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7431 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7432 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7433 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox 7434 \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox 7435 }% 7436 } 7437\endgroup 7438 7439% start the verbatim environment. 7440\def\setupverbatim{% 7441 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7442 \nonfillstart 7443 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7444 \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}% 7445 \tabexpand 7446 \setcodequotes 7447 % Respect line breaks, 7448 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7449 % make each space count. 7450 % Must do in this order: 7451 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7452} 7453 7454% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7455% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7456% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7457% 7458% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7459% 7460% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7461\begingroup 7462 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7463 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7464\endgroup 7465% 7466\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7467% 7468% 7469% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7470% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7471% 7472% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7473% 7474% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7475% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7476% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7477% 7478% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7479% 7480\begingroup 7481 \catcode`\ =\active 7482 \obeylines % 7483 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7484 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7485 % line in the output. 7486 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{% 7487 \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7488 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7489 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7490 % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in 7491 % the block. 7492\endgroup 7493% 7494\envdef\verbatim{% 7495 \setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim 7496} 7497\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7498 7499 7500% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7501% 7502\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7503% 7504\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7505 {% 7506 \makevalueexpandable 7507 \setupverbatim 7508 {% 7509 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7510 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7511 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7512 \expandafter 7513 }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup 7514 \afterenvbreak 7515 }% 7516} 7517 7518% @copying ... @end copying. 7519% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7520% 7521% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7522% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7523% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7524% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7525% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7526% possible is desirable. 7527% 7528\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7529\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7530% 7531\def\insertcopying{% 7532 \begingroup 7533 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7534 \scanexp\copyingtext 7535 \endgroup 7536} 7537 7538 7539\message{defuns,} 7540% @defun etc. 7541 7542\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7543\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7544\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7545\newcount\defunpenalty 7546 7547% Start the processing of @deffn: 7548\def\startdefun{% 7549 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7550 \medbreak 7551 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7552 % following @def command, see below. 7553 \else 7554 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7555 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7556 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7557 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7558 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7559 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7560 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7561 % 7562 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7563 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7564 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7565 % @def command. 7566 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7567 % 7568 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7569 % But do insert the glue. 7570 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7571 \fi 7572 % 7573 \parindent=0in 7574 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7575 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7576} 7577 7578\def\dodefunx#1{% 7579 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7580 \checkenv#1% 7581 % 7582 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7583 % It's not a great place, though. 7584 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7585 % 7586 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7587 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7588} 7589\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7590 7591% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7592% 7593\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7594 \begingroup 7595 % call \deffnheader: 7596 #1#2 \endheader 7597 % common ending: 7598 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7599 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7600 \endgraf 7601 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7602 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7603 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7604 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7605 \checkparencounts 7606 \endgroup 7607} 7608 7609\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7610 7611% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7612% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7613% 7614\def\makedefun#1{% 7615 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7616 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7617 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7618 \temp 7619} 7620 7621% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7622% 7623% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7624% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7625% 7626\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7627 \envdef#1{% 7628 \startdefun 7629 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7630 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7631 }% 7632 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7633 \def#3% 7634} 7635 7636\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7637\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7638 7639% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7640% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7641% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7642% 7643\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7644 \def\temp{#1}% 7645 \ifx\temp\onword 7646 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7647 = \empty 7648 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7649 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7650 = \relax 7651 \else 7652 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7653 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7654 must be on|off}% 7655 \fi\fi 7656} 7657 7658% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7659% 7660% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7661% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7662% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7663% behaviour though.) 7664\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7665 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7666 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7667 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7668 \else 7669 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7670 \fi 7671} 7672 7673% Untyped functions: 7674 7675% @deffn category name args 7676\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7677 7678% @deffn category class name args 7679\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7680 7681% \defopon {category on}class name args 7682\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7683 7684% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7685% 7686\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7687 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7688 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7689} 7690 7691% Typed functions: 7692 7693% @deftypefn category type name args 7694\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7695 7696% @deftypeop category class type name args 7697\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7698 7699% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7700\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7701 7702% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7703% 7704\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7705 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7706 \doingtypefntrue 7707 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7708} 7709 7710% Typed variables: 7711 7712% @deftypevr category type var args 7713\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7714 7715% @deftypecv category class type var args 7716\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7717 7718% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7719\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7720 7721% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7722% 7723\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7724 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7725 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7726} 7727 7728% Untyped variables: 7729 7730% @defvr category var args 7731\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7732 7733% @defcv category class var args 7734\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7735 7736% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7737\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7738 7739% Types: 7740 7741% @deftp category name args 7742\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7743 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7744 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7745} 7746 7747% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7748\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7749\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7750\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7751\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7752\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7753\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7754\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7755\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7756\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7757\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7758\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7759 7760% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7761% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7762% #2 is the return type, if any. 7763% #3 is the function name. 7764% 7765% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7766% 7767\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7768 \par 7769 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7770 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7771 % 7772 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7773 % on a line by itself. 7774 \rettypeownlinefalse 7775 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7776 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7777 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7778 \rettypeownlinetrue 7779 \fi 7780 \fi 7781 % 7782 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7783 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7784 % just below it. 7785 \def\temp{#1}% 7786 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7787 % 7788 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7789 % least two. 7790 \tempnum = 2 7791 % 7792 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7793 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7794 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7795 % 7796 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7797 \ifrettypeownline 7798 \advance\tempnum by 1 7799 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7800 \else 7801 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7802 \fi 7803 % 7804 % The continuations: 7805 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7806 % 7807 % The final paragraph shape: 7808 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7809 % 7810 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7811 \noindent 7812 \hbox to 0pt{% 7813 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7814 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7815 \kern\leftskip 7816 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7817 }% 7818 % 7819 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7820 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7821 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7822 {% 7823 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7824 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7825 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7826 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7827 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7828 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7829 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7830 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7831 \df \tt 7832 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7833 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7834 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7835 \ifrettypeownline 7836 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7837 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7838 \else 7839 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7840 \fi 7841 \fi % no return type 7842 #3% output function name 7843 }% 7844 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7845 % 7846 \boldbrax 7847 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7848} 7849 7850% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7851% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7852% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7853% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7854% 7855\def\defunargs#1{% 7856 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7857 % tt for the names. 7858 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7859 % 7860 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7861 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7862 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7863 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7864 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7865 \def\var##1{{\setregularquotes\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7866 #1% 7867 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7868} 7869 7870% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7871% 7872\def\activeparens{% 7873 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7874 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7875 \catcode`\&=\active 7876} 7877 7878% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7879\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7880 7881% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7882% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7883% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7884{ 7885 \activeparens 7886 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7887 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7888 \global\let& = \& 7889 7890 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7891 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7892} 7893\let\ampchar\& 7894 7895\newcount\parencount 7896 7897% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7898\newif\ifampseen 7899\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7900 7901\def\parenfont{% 7902 \ifampseen 7903 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7904 % otherwise use the default font. 7905 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7906 \else 7907 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7908 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7909 \sf 7910 \fi 7911} 7912\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7913 \ifampseen 7914 \ifnum\parencount=1 7915 #1% 7916 \fi 7917 \fi 7918} 7919\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7920 7921\def\opnr{% 7922 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7923 {\parenfont(}% 7924 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7925} 7926\def\clnr{% 7927 {\parenfont)}% 7928 \infirstlevel \sl 7929 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7930} 7931 7932\newcount\brackcount 7933\def\lbrb{% 7934 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7935 {\bf[}% 7936} 7937\def\rbrb{% 7938 {\bf]}% 7939 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7940} 7941 7942\def\checkparencounts{% 7943 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7944 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7945} 7946% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7947% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7948\def\badparencount{% 7949 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7950 \global\parencount=0 7951} 7952\def\badbrackcount{% 7953 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7954 \global\brackcount=0 7955} 7956 7957 7958\message{macros,} 7959% @macro. 7960 7961% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7962% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7963\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7964 \newwrite\macscribble 7965 \def\scantokens#1{% 7966 \toks0={#1}% 7967 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7968 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7969 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7970 \input \jobname.tmp 7971 } 7972\fi 7973 7974\let\E=\expandafter 7975 7976% Used at the time of macro expansion. 7977% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 7978\def\scanmacro#1{% 7979 \newlinechar`\^^M 7980 % expand the expansion of \eatleadingcr twice to maybe remove a leading 7981 % newline (and \else and \fi tokens), then call \eatspaces on the result. 7982 \def\xeatspaces##1{% 7983 \E\E\E\E\E\E\E\eatspaces\E\E\E\E\E\E\E{\eatleadingcr##1% 7984 }}% 7985 \def\xempty##1{}% 7986 % 7987 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 7988 \scantokens{#1@comment}% 7989 % 7990 % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 7991 % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla 7992 % in math mode. 7993} 7994 7995% Used for copying and captions 7996\def\scanexp#1{% 7997 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 7998} 7999 8000\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8001\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8002\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8003 8004% List of all defined macros in the form 8005% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8006% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8007% if there is a need. 8008\def\macrolist{} 8009 8010% Add the macro to \macrolist 8011\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8012\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8013 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8014 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8015} 8016 8017% Utility routines. 8018% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8019% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8020% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8021% 8022\def\cslet#1#2{% 8023 \expandafter\let 8024 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8025 \csname#2\endcsname 8026} 8027 8028% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8029% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8030{\catcode`\@=11 8031\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8032\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8033\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8034\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8035\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8036} 8037 8038{\catcode`\^^M=\other% 8039\gdef\eatleadingcr#1{\if\noexpand#1\noexpand^^M\else\E#1\fi}}% 8040% Warning: this won't work for a delimited argument 8041% or for an empty argument 8042 8043% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8044{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8045\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8046\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8047\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8048} 8049 8050% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8051% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8052% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8053% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8054% 8055% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8056% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8057% confine the change to the current group. 8058% 8059% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8060% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8061% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8062% 8063\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8064 \catcode`\"=\other 8065 \catcode`\+=\other 8066 \catcode`\<=\other 8067 \catcode`\>=\other 8068 \catcode`\^=\other 8069 \catcode`\_=\other 8070 \catcode`\|=\other 8071 \catcode`\~=\other 8072 \passthroughcharstrue 8073} 8074 8075\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8076 \scanctxt 8077 \catcode`\@=\other 8078 \catcode`\\=\other 8079 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8080} 8081 8082\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8083 \scanctxt 8084 \catcode`\ =\other 8085 \catcode`\@=\other 8086 \catcode`\{=\other 8087 \catcode`\}=\other 8088 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8089 \usembodybackslash 8090} 8091 8092% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8093% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8094% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8095\def\macroargctxt{% 8096 \scanctxt 8097 \catcode`\ =\active 8098 \catcode`\@=\other 8099 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8100 \catcode`\\=\active 8101} 8102 8103\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8104 \scanctxt 8105 \catcode`\@=\other 8106 \catcode`\{=\other 8107 \catcode`\}=\other 8108} 8109 8110% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8111% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8112% where N is the macro parameter number. 8113% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8114% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8115% 8116{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8117 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8118 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8119} 8120\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8121 8122\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8123 8124\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8125\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8126 8127\def\macroxxx#1{% 8128 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8129 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8130 \paramno=0\relax 8131 \else 8132 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8133 \if\paramno>256\relax 8134 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8135 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8136 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8137 \fi 8138 \fi 8139 \fi 8140 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8141 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8142 \else 8143 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8144 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8145 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8146 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8147 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8148 \fi 8149 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8150 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8151 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8152 \fi} 8153 8154\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8155 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8156 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8157 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8158 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8159 \begingroup 8160 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8161 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8162 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8163 \endgroup 8164 \else 8165 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8166 \fi 8167} 8168 8169% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8170% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8171% 8172\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8173 \ifx #1\relax 8174 % remove this 8175 \else 8176 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8177 \fi 8178} 8179 8180% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8181% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8182\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8183\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8184\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8185\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8186% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8187% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8188% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8189 8190% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8191% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8192% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8193% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8194% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8195% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8196% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8197% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8198% 8199% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8200% 8201% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8202% \parsemmanyargdef. 8203% 8204\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8205 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8206 \let\hash\relax 8207 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8208 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8209 \let\xempty\relax 8210 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8211 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8212 \paramno0\relax 8213 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8214 \fi 8215} 8216\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8217 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8218 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8219 \advance\paramno by 1 8220 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8221 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno\noexpand\xempty{}}}% 8222 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8223 \fi\next} 8224% the \xempty{} is to give \eatleadingcr an argument in the case of an 8225% empty macro argument. 8226 8227% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8228% 8229% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8230% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8231% 8232% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8233% body to be transformed. 8234% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8235% 8236{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8237\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8238{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8239\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8240 8241% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8242\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8243\catcode `@=11\relax 8244 8245%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8246 8247% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8248% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8249% processed again to replace the arguments. 8250% 8251% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8252% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8253% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8254% 8255% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8256% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8257% 8258% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8259% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8260% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8261% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8262% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8263% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8264\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8265 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8266 \else 8267 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8268 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8269 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8270 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8271 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8272 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8273 % \xdef . 8274 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8275 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8276 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8277 \fi\next} 8278 8279 8280\let\endargs@\relax 8281\let\nil@\relax 8282\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8283\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8284 8285% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8286% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8287% macarg.ARGNAME 8288% 8289% #1 is the macro name 8290% #2 is the list of argument names 8291% #3 is the list of argument values 8292\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8293 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8294 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8295 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8296 \def\macroname{#1}% 8297 \begingroup 8298 \macroargctxt 8299 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8300 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8301 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8302 \setemptyargvalues@ 8303 \else 8304 \getargvals@@ 8305 \fi 8306} 8307\def\getargvals@@{% 8308 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8309 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8310 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8311 \else 8312 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8313 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8314 \fi 8315 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8316 \else 8317 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8318 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8319 % macros to empty. 8320 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8321 \else 8322 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8323 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8324 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8325 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8326 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8327 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8328 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8329 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8330 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8331 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8332 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8333 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8334 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8335 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8336 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8337 \fi 8338 \fi 8339 \next 8340} 8341 8342\def\push@#1#2{% 8343 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8344 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8345 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8346 \expandafter#1#2}% 8347} 8348 8349% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8350% in macro \@tempa. 8351% 8352\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8353 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8354 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8355 % values into respective token registers. 8356 % 8357 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8358 \begingroup 8359 \paramno0\relax 8360 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8361 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8362 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8363 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8364 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8365 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8366 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8367 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8368 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8369 % group. 8370 \expandafter 8371 \endgroup 8372 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8373 } 8374 8375% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8376% 8377\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8378 \expandafter 8379 \endgroup 8380 \macargdeflist@ 8381 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8382 % is in \@tempa . 8383 \macvalstoargs@ 8384 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8385 % with \@tempb . 8386 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8387 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8388 % \egroup . 8389 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8390 \let\@tempc\relax 8391 \else 8392 \let\@tempc\egroup 8393 \fi 8394 % And now we do the real job: 8395 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8396 \@tempd 8397} 8398 8399\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8400 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8401 \else 8402 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8403 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8404 % alias \@tempb . 8405 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8406 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8407 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8408 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8409 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8410 \fi 8411 \next 8412} 8413 8414% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8415% 8416\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8417 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8418 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8419 \else 8420 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8421 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8422 \fi 8423 \next 8424} 8425 8426\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8427 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8428 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8429 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8430 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8431} 8432 8433% #1 is the element target macro 8434% #2 is the list macro 8435% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8436\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8437 \def#1{#3}% 8438 \def#2{#4}% 8439} 8440\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8441 \long\def#1{#3}% 8442 \long\def#2{#4}% 8443} 8444 8445 8446%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8447 8448 8449% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8450% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8451% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8452% \paramno is the number of parameters 8453% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8454% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8455% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8456% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8457% 8458\def\defmacro{% 8459 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8460 \ifnum\paramno=1 8461 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8462 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8463 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8464 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8465 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8466 \else 8467 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8468 \fi 8469 \ifcase\paramno 8470 % 0 8471 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8472 \bgroup 8473 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8474 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8475 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8476 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8477 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8478 \egroup 8479 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8480 \or % 1 8481 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8482 \bgroup 8483 \noexpand\braceorline 8484 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8485 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8486 \egroup 8487 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8488 }% 8489 \else % at most 9 8490 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8491 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8492 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8493 % comma. 8494 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8495 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8496 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8497 \bgroup 8498 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8499 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8500 \noexpand\expandafter 8501 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8502 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8503 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8504 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8505 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8506 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8507 \expandafter\expandafter 8508 \expandafter\xdef 8509 \expandafter\expandafter 8510 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8511 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8512 \else % 10 or more: 8513 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8514 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8515 }% 8516 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8517 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8518 \fi 8519 \fi} 8520 8521\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8522 8523\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8524 8525 8526%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8527% 8528{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8529@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8530@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8531 8532% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8533% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8534% compressed to one. 8535% 8536% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8537% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8538% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8539% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8540% 8541% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8542% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8543% 8544% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8545% 8546% where: 8547% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8548% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8549% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8550% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8551 8552@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8553 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8554} 8555@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8556 8557% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8558% #2 - PENDING_BS 8559% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8560% #4 used to look ahead 8561% 8562% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8563% otherwise, remove the next token. 8564@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8565 @ifx#4\% 8566 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8567 @else 8568 @expandafter@add_segment 8569 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8570} 8571 8572% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8573% #2 - PENDING_BS 8574% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8575% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8576% #5 looks ahead 8577% 8578% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8579@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8580 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8581} 8582 8583@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8584 8585% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8586% #2 - PENDING_BS 8587% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8588% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8589% 8590% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8591% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8592% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8593% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8594% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8595% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8596% added to ARG_RESULT. 8597@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8598@ifx#3@_finish 8599 @call_the_macro#1!% 8600@else 8601 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8602 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8603 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8604 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8605 % long #4 is. 8606} 8607 8608% #1 - THE_MACRO 8609% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8610% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8611% conditional. 8612@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8613 8614} 8615%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8616 8617% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8618% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8619% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8620% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8621% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8622% 8623\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8624\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8625 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8626 \macroargctxt 8627 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8628 \else 8629 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8630 \fi \macnamexxx} 8631 8632 8633% @alias. 8634% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8635% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8636% 8637\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8638\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8639\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8640 {% 8641 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8642 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8643 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8644 }% 8645 \next 8646} 8647 8648 8649\message{cross references,} 8650 8651\newwrite\auxfile 8652\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8653\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8654 8655% @inforef is relatively simple. 8656\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8657\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8658 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8659 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8660 8661% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8662% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8663% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8664% @node foo , bar , ... 8665% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8666% 8667\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8668% 8669% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8670% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8671\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8672\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode} 8673 8674% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex 8675% conditional. 8676% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need 8677% that here. 8678\def\omittopnode{% 8679 \ifx\lastnode\wordTop 8680 \expandafter\ignorenode\fi 8681} 8682\def\wordTop{Top} 8683 8684% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not 8685% output. 8686\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}% 8687\ignorenodebye 8688} 8689 8690{\let\bye\relax 8691\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef} 8692\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}} 8693% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer 8694 8695\let\lastnode=\empty 8696 8697% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8698% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8699% 8700\def\donoderef#1{% 8701 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8702 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8703 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8704 \fi 8705} 8706 8707% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8708% 8709\newcount\savesfregister 8710% 8711\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8712\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8713\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8714 8715% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8716% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8717% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8718% or the anchor name. 8719% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8720% empty for anchors. 8721% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8722% 8723% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8724% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8725% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8726% 8727\def\setref#1#2{% 8728 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8729 \iflinks 8730 {% 8731 \requireauxfile 8732 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8733 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8734 \def\value##1{##1}% 8735 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8736 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8737 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8738 }% 8739 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8740 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8741 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8742 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8743 }% 8744 \fi 8745} 8746 8747% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8748% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8749% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8750% variable, now it's official. 8751% 8752\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8753 \def\temp{#1}% 8754 \ifx\temp\onword 8755 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8756 = \empty 8757 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8758 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8759 = \relax 8760 \else 8761 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8762 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8763 must be on|off}% 8764 \fi\fi 8765} 8766 8767% 8768% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8769% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8770% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8771% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8772% 8773\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8774\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8775\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8776 8777\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8778\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8779% 8780\newbox\toprefbox 8781\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8782\newbox\infofilenamebox 8783\newbox\printedmanualbox 8784% 8785\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8786 \unsepspaces 8787 % 8788 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8789 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8790 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8791 % 8792 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8793 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8794 % 8795 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8796 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8797 % 8798 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8799 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8800 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8801 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8802 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8803 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8804 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8805 \else 8806 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8807 % the square brackets if we have it. 8808 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8809 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8810 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8811 \else 8812 \ifhavexrefs 8813 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8814 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}}% 8815 \else 8816 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8817 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8818 \fi% 8819 \fi 8820 \fi 8821 \fi 8822 % 8823 % Make link in pdf output. 8824 \ifpdf 8825 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8826 {\indexnofonts 8827 \makevalueexpandable 8828 \turnoffactive 8829 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8830 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8831 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8832 \getfilename{#4}% 8833 % 8834 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8835 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8836 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8837 % 8838 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8839 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8840 \fi 8841 % 8842 \leavevmode 8843 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8844 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8845 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8846 \else 8847 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8848 \fi 8849 }% 8850 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8851 \else 8852 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8853 \else 8854 % For XeTeX 8855 {\indexnofonts 8856 \makevalueexpandable 8857 \turnoffactive 8858 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8859 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8860 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8861 \getfilename{#4}% 8862 % 8863 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8864 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8865 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8866 % 8867 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8868 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8869 \fi 8870 % 8871 \leavevmode 8872 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8873 % With default settings, 8874 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8875 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8876 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8877 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8878 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8879 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8880 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8881 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8882 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8883 \else 8884 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8885 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8886 \fi 8887 }% 8888 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8889 \fi 8890 \fi 8891 {% 8892 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8893 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8894 \indexnofonts 8895 \turnoffactive 8896 \def\value##1{##1}% 8897 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8898 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8899 }% 8900 % 8901 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8902 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8903 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8904 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8905 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8906 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8907 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8908 \refx{#1-snt}% 8909 \else 8910 \printedrefname 8911 \fi 8912 % 8913 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8914 % "in MANUALNAME". 8915 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8916 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8917 \fi 8918 \else 8919 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8920 % 8921 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8922 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8923 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8924 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8925 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8926 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8927 % 8928 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8929 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8930 % 8931 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8932 % 8933 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8934 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8935 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8936 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8937 % 8938 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8939 % 8940 \else 8941 % Reference within this manual. 8942 % 8943 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty, as the ref 8944 % will be empty for @unnumbered and @anchor. 8945 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}}% 8946 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8947 % 8948 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8949 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8950 % 8951 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiomitxrefpg\endcsname\relax 8952 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8953 ,\space 8954 % 8955 % output the `page 3'. 8956 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}% 8957 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 8958 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 8959 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 8960 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 8961 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 8962 \else\ifx\ 8963 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 8964 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 8965 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 8966 \fi 8967 \fi\fi 8968 \fi 8969 \endlink 8970\endgroup} 8971 8972% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8973% 8974% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8975% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8976% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8977% 8978% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8979% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8980% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8981% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8982% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8983% 8984% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8985% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8986% 8987\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8988 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8989 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8990 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8991 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8992 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8993 \fi 8994 \fi 8995 #1% 8996} 8997 8998% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 8999% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9000% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9001% one that Bob is working on :). 9002% 9003\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9004 9005% Things referred to by \setref. 9006% 9007\def\Ynothing{} 9008\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9009\def\Ynumbered{% 9010 \ifnum\secno=0 9011 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9012 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9013 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9014 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9015 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9016 \else 9017 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9018 \fi\fi\fi 9019} 9020\def\Yappendix{% 9021 \ifnum\secno=0 9022 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9023 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9024 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9025 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9026 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9027 \else 9028 \putwordSection@tie 9029 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9030 \fi\fi\fi 9031} 9032 9033% \refx{NAME} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 9034\def\refx#1{% 9035 \requireauxfile 9036 {% 9037 \indexnofonts 9038 \turnoffactive 9039 \def\value##1{##1}% 9040 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9041 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9042 }% 9043 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9044 % If not defined, say something at least. 9045 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9046 \iflinks 9047 \ifhavexrefs 9048 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9049 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9050 \else 9051 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9052 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9053 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9054 \fi 9055 \fi 9056 \fi 9057 \else 9058 % It's defined, so just use it. 9059 \thisrefX 9060 \fi 9061} 9062 9063% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9064% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9065% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9066% type, we have more work to do. 9067% 9068\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9069 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9070 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9071 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9072 \indexnofonts 9073 \turnoffactive 9074 \def\value##1{##1}% 9075 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9076 }% 9077 % 9078 \bgroup 9079 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9080 \egroup 9081 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9082 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9083 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9084 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9085 % 9086 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9087 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9088 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9089 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9090 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9091 % 9092 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9093 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9094 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9095 \else 9096 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9097 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9098 \fi 9099 % 9100 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9101 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9102 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9103 {\safexrefname}}% 9104 \fi 9105} 9106 9107% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9108% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9109% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9110% 9111\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9112\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9113 9114% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9115\def\requireauxfile{% 9116 \iflinks 9117 \tryauxfile 9118 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9119 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9120 \fi 9121 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9122} 9123 9124% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9125% 9126\def\tryauxfile{% 9127 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9128 \ifeof 1 \else 9129 \readdatafile{aux}% 9130 \global\havexrefstrue 9131 \fi 9132 \closein 1 9133} 9134 9135\def\setupdatafile{% 9136 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9137 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9138 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9139 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9140 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9141 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9142 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9143 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9144 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9145 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9146 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9147 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9148 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9149 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9150 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9151 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9152 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9153 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9154 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9155 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9156 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9157 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9158 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9159 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9160 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9161 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9162 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9163 \catcode`\^=\other 9164 % 9165 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9166 \catcode`\~=\other 9167 \catcode`\[=\other 9168 \catcode`\]=\other 9169 \catcode`\"=\other 9170 \catcode`\_=\active 9171 \catcode`\|=\active 9172 \catcode`\<=\active 9173 \catcode`\>=\active 9174 \catcode`\$=\other 9175 \catcode`\#=\other 9176 \catcode`\&=\other 9177 \catcode`\%=\other 9178 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9179 % 9180 \catcode`\\=\active 9181 % 9182 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9183 \catcode`\{=1 9184 \catcode`\}=2 9185 \catcode`\@=0 9186} 9187 9188\def\readdatafile#1{% 9189\begingroup 9190 \setupdatafile 9191 \input\jobname.#1 9192\endgroup} 9193 9194 9195\message{insertions,} 9196% including footnotes. 9197 9198\newcount \footnoteno 9199 9200% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9201% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9202% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9203% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9204% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9205\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9206 9207% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9208\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9209 9210{\catcode `\@=11 9211% 9212% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9213\gdef\footnote{% 9214 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9215 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9216 % 9217 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9218 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9219 \let\@sf\empty 9220 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9221 % 9222 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9223 \unskip 9224 \thisfootno\@sf 9225 \dofootnote 9226}% 9227 9228% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9229% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9230% 9231% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9232% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9233% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9234% 9235\gdef\dofootnote{% 9236 \insert\footins\bgroup 9237 % 9238 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9239 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9240 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9241 % 9242 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9243 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9244 % So reset some parameters. 9245 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9246 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9247 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9248 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9249 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9250 \leftskip\z@skip 9251 \rightskip\z@skip 9252 \spaceskip\z@skip 9253 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9254 \parindent\defaultparindent 9255 % 9256 \smallfonts \rm 9257 % 9258 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9259 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9260 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9261 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9262 \let\noindent = \relax 9263 % 9264 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9265 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9266 \everypar = {\hang}% 9267 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9268 % 9269 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9270 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9271 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9272 \footstrut 9273 % 9274 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9275 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9276} 9277}%end \catcode `\@=11 9278 9279\def\errfootnotenest{% 9280 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9281 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9282 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9283} 9284 9285\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9286 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9287 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9288} 9289 9290% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9291% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9292% would be lost. 9293% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9294% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9295% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9296% 9297% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9298% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9299% out prematurely. 9300% 9301\def\startsavinginserts{% 9302 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9303 \let\insert\saveinsert 9304 \else 9305 \let\checkinserts\relax 9306 \fi 9307} 9308 9309% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9310% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9311% 9312\def\saveinsert#1{% 9313 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9314 \afterassignment\next 9315 % swallow the left brace 9316 \let\temp = 9317} 9318\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9319\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9320 9321\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9322 9323\def\placesaveins#1{% 9324 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9325 {\box#1}% 9326} 9327 9328% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9329{ 9330 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9331 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9332} 9333 9334% initialization: 9335\def\newsaveins #1{% 9336 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9337 \next 9338} 9339\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9340 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9341 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9342 \checksaveins #1}% 9343} 9344 9345% initialize: 9346\let\checkinserts\empty 9347\newsaveins\footins 9348\newsaveins\margin 9349 9350 9351% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9352% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9353% 9354% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9355% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9356% undone and the next image would fail. 9357\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9358\ifeof 1 \else 9359 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9360 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9361 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9362 \input epsf.tex 9363\fi 9364\closein 1 9365% 9366% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9367\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9368\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9369 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9370 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9371% 9372\def\image#1{% 9373 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9374 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9375 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9376 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9377 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9378 \fi 9379 \else 9380 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9381 \fi 9382} 9383% 9384% Arguments to @image: 9385% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9386% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9387% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9388% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9389% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9390\newif\ifimagevmode 9391\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9392 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9393 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9394 \makevalueexpandable 9395 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9396 \ifvmode 9397 \imagevmodetrue 9398 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9399 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9400 \imagevmodetrue 9401 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9402 \fi\fi 9403 % 9404 \ifimagevmode 9405 \nobreak\medskip 9406 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9407 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9408 % above and below. 9409 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9410 \nobreak 9411 \fi 9412 % 9413 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9414 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9415 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9416 % normal paragraph indentation. 9417 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9418 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9419 % eradicate the centering. 9420 \ifx\centersub\centerV \else \imageindent \fi 9421 % 9422 % Output the image. 9423 \ifpdf 9424 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9425 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9426 \else 9427 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9428 % For epsf.tex 9429 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9430 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9431 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9432 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9433 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9434 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9435 \else 9436 % For XeTeX 9437 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9438 \fi 9439 \fi 9440 % 9441 \ifimagevmode 9442 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9443 \fi 9444 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9445\endgroup} 9446 9447 9448% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9449% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9450% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9451% 9452\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9453 9454% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9455\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9456 9457% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9458% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9459% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9460% 9461% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9462% be referable. 9463% 9464% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9465% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9466% 9467% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9468% chapter-level command. 9469\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9470% 9471\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9472 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9473 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9474 % 9475 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9476 % 9477 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9478 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9479 % 9480 \startsavinginserts 9481 % 9482 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9483 \par 9484 % 9485 \vtop\bgroup 9486 \def\floattype{#1}% 9487 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9488 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9489 % 9490 \ifx\floattype\empty 9491 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9492 \else 9493 {% 9494 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9495 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9496 \indexnofonts 9497 \turnoffactive 9498 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9499 }% 9500 \fi 9501 % 9502 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9503 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9504 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9505 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9506 % 9507 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9508 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9509 % 9510 {% 9511 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9512 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9513 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9514 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9515 % lists of floats. 9516 % 9517 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9518 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9519 }% 9520 \fi 9521 % 9522 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9523 \vskip\parskip 9524 % 9525 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9526 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9527} 9528 9529% we have these possibilities: 9530% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9531% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9532% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9533% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9534% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9535% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9536% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9537% @float & no caption: 9538% 9539\def\Efloat{% 9540 \let\floatident = \empty 9541 % 9542 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9543 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9544 % 9545 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9546 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9547 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9548 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9549 \fi 9550 % the number. 9551 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9552 \fi 9553 % 9554 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9555 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9556 \let\captionline = \floatident 9557 % 9558 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9559 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9560 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9561 \fi 9562 % 9563 % caption text. 9564 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9565 \fi 9566 % 9567 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9568 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9569 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9570 \vskip.5\parskip 9571 \captionline 9572 % 9573 % Space below caption. 9574 \vskip\parskip 9575 \fi 9576 % 9577 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9578 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9579 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9580 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9581 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9582 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9583 {% 9584 \requireauxfile 9585 \atdummies 9586 % 9587 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9588 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9589 \else 9590 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9591 \fi 9592 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9593 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9594 }% 9595 \fi 9596 \egroup % end of \vtop 9597 % 9598 \checkinserts 9599} 9600 9601% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9602% 9603\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9604 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9605} 9606 9607% @caption, @shortcaption 9608% 9609\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9610\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9611\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9612\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9613 9614% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9615% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9616\def\getfloatno#1{% 9617 \ifx#1\relax 9618 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9619 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9620 % 9621 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9622 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9623 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9624 \fi 9625 \let\floatno#1% 9626} 9627 9628% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9629% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9630% first read the @float command. 9631% 9632\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9633 9634% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9635% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9636\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9637 9638% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9639% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9640% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9641% 9642\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9643% 9644% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9645% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9646% 9647\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9648 \def\temp{#1}% 9649 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9650 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9651} 9652 9653% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9654% 9655\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9656 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9657 {% 9658 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9659 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9660 \indexnofonts 9661 \turnoffactive 9662 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9663 }% 9664 % 9665 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9666 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9667 \ifhavexrefs 9668 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9669 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9670 \fi 9671 \else 9672 \begingroup 9673 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9674 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9675 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9676 \endgroup 9677 \fi 9678} 9679 9680% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9681% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9682% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9683% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9684% 9685% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9686% they won't appear in the aux file). 9687% 9688\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9689\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9690 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9691 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9692 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9693 % in pdf output. 9694 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9695 % 9696 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9697 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9698 \writeentry 9699}} 9700 9701 9702\message{localization,} 9703 9704% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9705% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9706% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9707% 9708{ 9709 \catcode`\_ = \active 9710 \globaldefs=1 9711\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9712 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9713 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9714 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9715 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9716 \ifeof 1 9717 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9718 \else 9719 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9720 \input txi-#1.tex 9721 \fi 9722 \closein 1 9723 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9724} 9725% 9726% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9727% try txi-de.tex. 9728% 9729\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9730 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9731 \ifeof 1 9732 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9733 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9734 \else 9735 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9736 \input txi-#1.tex 9737 \fi 9738 \closein 1 9739} 9740}% end of special _ catcode 9741% 9742\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9743is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9744directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9745 9746% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9747% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9748% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9749% 9750% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9751% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9752% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9753% 9754% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9755% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9756% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9757% accented characters problem.) 9758% 9759\catcode`@=11 9760\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9761 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9762 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9763 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9764 \else 9765 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9766 \fi 9767 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9768 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9769 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9770} 9771 9772% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9773% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9774% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9775% 9776\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9777\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9778 9779\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9780 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9781 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9782 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9783 \else 9784 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9785 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9786 \fi 9787\else 9788 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9789 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9790\fi 9791 9792% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9793% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9794% 9795\def\setbytewiseio{% 9796 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9797 \else 9798 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9799 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9800 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9801 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9802 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9803 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9804 \fi 9805 9806 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9807 \else 9808 \directlua{ 9809 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9810 local function convert_char (char) 9811 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9812 end 9813 9814 local function convert_line (line) 9815 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9816 end 9817 9818 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9819 9820 local function convert_line_out (line) 9821 local line_out = "" 9822 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9823 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9824 end 9825 return line_out 9826 end 9827 9828 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9829 } 9830 \fi 9831 9832 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9833} 9834 9835 9836% Helpers for encodings. 9837% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9838% 9839\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9840 \count255=128 9841 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9842 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9843 \advance\count255 by 1 9844 \repeat 9845} 9846 9847\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9848 \count255=128 9849 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9850 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9851 \advance\count255 by 1 9852 \repeat 9853} 9854 9855% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9856% according to the specified encoding. 9857% 9858\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9859\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9860 % 9861 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9862 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9863 % 9864 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9865 % to compare them with \ifx. 9866 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9867 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9868 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9869 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9870 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9871 % 9872 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9873 \asciichardefs 9874 % 9875 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9876 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9877 \setbytewiseio 9878 \fi 9879 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9880 \lattwochardefs 9881 % 9882 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9883 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9884 \setbytewiseio 9885 \fi 9886 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9887 \latonechardefs 9888 % 9889 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9890 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9891 \setbytewiseio 9892 \fi 9893 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9894 \latninechardefs 9895 % 9896 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9897 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9898 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9899 \nativeunicodechardefs 9900 \else 9901 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9902 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9903 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9904 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9905 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9906 % sufficient. 9907 \fi 9908 % 9909 \else 9910 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9911 % 9912 \fi % utfeight 9913 \fi % latnine 9914 \fi % latone 9915 \fi % lattwo 9916 \fi % ascii 9917 % 9918 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9919 \else 9920 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9921 \else 9922 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9923 \else 9924 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9925 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9926 \fi 9927 \fi 9928 \fi 9929} 9930 9931% emacs-page 9932% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9933% the default font encoding (OT1). 9934% 9935\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9936 9937% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 9938\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 9939 9940% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 9941% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 9942% macros containing the character definitions. 9943\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9944% 9945 9946\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 9947\gdef#1{% 9948 \ifpassthroughchars 9949 \string#1% 9950 \else 9951 #2% 9952 \fi 9953}} 9954 9955% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 9956\def\latonechardefs{% 9957 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 9958 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 9959 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 9960 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 9961 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 9962 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 9963 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 9964 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 9965 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 9966 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 9967 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 9968 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 9969 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 9970 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 9971 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 9972 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 9973 % 9974 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 9975 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 9976 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 9977 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 9978 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 9979 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 9980 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 9981 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 9982 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9983 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 9984 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 9985 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 9986 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 9987 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 9988 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 9989 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 9990 % 9991 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 9992 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 9993 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 9994 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 9995 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 9996 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 9997 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 9998 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 9999 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10000 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10001 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10002 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10003 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10004 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10005 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10006 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10007 % 10008 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10009 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10010 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10011 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10012 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10013 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10014 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10015 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10016 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10017 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10018 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10019 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10020 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10021 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10022 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10023 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10024 % 10025 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10026 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10027 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10028 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10029 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10030 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10031 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10032 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10033 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10034 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10035 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10036 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10037 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10038 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10039 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10040 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10041 % 10042 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10043 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10044 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10045 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10046 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10047 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10048 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10049 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10050 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10051 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10052 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10053 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10054 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10055 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10056 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10057 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10058} 10059 10060% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10061\def\latninechardefs{% 10062 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10063 \latonechardefs 10064 % 10065 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10066 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10067 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10068 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10069 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10070 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10071 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10072 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10073} 10074 10075% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10076\def\lattwochardefs{% 10077 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10078 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10079 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10080 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10081 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10082 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10083 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10084 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10085 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10086 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10087 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10088 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10089 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10090 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10091 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10092 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10093 % 10094 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10095 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10096 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10097 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10098 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10099 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10100 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10101 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10102 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10103 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10104 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10105 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10106 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10107 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10108 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10109 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10110 % 10111 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10112 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10113 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10114 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10115 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10116 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10117 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10118 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10119 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10120 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10121 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10122 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10123 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10124 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10125 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10126 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10127 % 10128 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10129 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10130 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10131 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10132 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10133 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10134 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10135 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10136 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10137 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10138 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10139 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10140 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10141 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10142 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10143 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10144 % 10145 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10146 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10147 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10148 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10149 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10150 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10151 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10152 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10153 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10154 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10155 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10156 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10157 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10158 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10159 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10160 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10161 % 10162 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10163 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10164 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10165 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10166 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10167 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10168 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10169 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10170 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10171 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10172 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10173 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10174 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10175 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10176 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10177 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10178} 10179 10180% UTF-8 character definitions. 10181% 10182% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10183% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10184% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10185% 10186\newcount\countUTFx 10187\newcount\countUTFy 10188\newcount\countUTFz 10189 10190\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10191 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10192% 10193\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10194 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10195% 10196\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10197 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10198 10199\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10200 \ifx #1\relax 10201 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10202 \else 10203 \expandafter #1% 10204 \fi 10205} 10206 10207% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10208\begingroup 10209 \catcode`\~13 10210 \catcode`\$12 10211 \catcode`\"12 10212 10213 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10214 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10215 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10216 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10217 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10218 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10219 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10220 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10221 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10222 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10223 \fi} 10224 10225 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10226 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10227 \countUTFx = "80 10228 \countUTFy = "C2 10229 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10230 \gdef~{% 10231 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10232 \UTFviiiLoop 10233 10234 \countUTFx = "C2 10235 \countUTFy = "E0 10236 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10237 \gdef~{% 10238 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10239 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10240 \UTFviiiLoop 10241 10242 \countUTFx = "E0 10243 \countUTFy = "F0 10244 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10245 \gdef~{% 10246 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10247 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10248 \UTFviiiLoop 10249 10250 \countUTFx = "F0 10251 \countUTFy = "F4 10252 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10253 \gdef~{% 10254 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10255 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10256 }}% 10257 \UTFviiiLoop 10258\endgroup 10259 10260\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10261 10262% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10263\def\U#1{% 10264 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10265 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10266 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10267 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10268 % letters are missing. 10269 \begingroup 10270 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10271 \uppercase{.} 10272 \endgroup 10273 \else 10274 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10275 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10276 \fi 10277 \else 10278 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10279 \fi 10280} 10281 10282% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10283% sequence to be defined. 10284\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10285 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10286\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10287 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10288\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10289 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10290 10291% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10292% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10293% this gets used by the @U command 10294% 10295\begingroup 10296 \catcode`\"=12 10297 \catcode`\<=12 10298 \catcode`\.=12 10299 \catcode`\,=12 10300 \catcode`\;=12 10301 \catcode`\!=12 10302 \catcode`\~=13 10303 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10304 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10305 \begingroup 10306 \parseXMLCharref 10307 10308 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10309 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10310 % 10311 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10312 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10313 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10314 % 10315 \expandafter\expandafter 10316 \expandafter\expandafter 10317 \expandafter\expandafter 10318 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10319 % 10320 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10321 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10322 \fi 10323 % 10324 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10325 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10326 \endgroup} 10327 % 10328 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10329 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10330 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10331 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10332 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10333 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10334 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10335 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10336 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10337 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10338 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10339 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10340 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10341 \else 10342 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10343 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10344 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10345 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10346 \fi\fi\fi 10347 } 10348 10349 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10350 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10351 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10352 % of the bytes. 10353 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10354 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10355 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10356 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10357 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10358 10359 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10360 % in order to get the last five bits. 10361 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10362 10363 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10364 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10365 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10366 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10367 10368 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10369 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10370 % sequence. 10371 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10372 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10373 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10374 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10375 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10376 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10377 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10378 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10379\endgroup 10380 10381% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10382% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10383% 10384\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10385 \catcode"#1=\other 10386} 10387 10388% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10389% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10390% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10391% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10392% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10393% 10394% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10395% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10396% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10397% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10398% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10399% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10400% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10401% 10402\def\unicodechardefs{% 10403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10419 % 10420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10436 % 10437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10453 % 10454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10470 % 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10487 % 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10504 % 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10521 % 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10538 % 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10555 % 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10572 % 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10589 % 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10606 % 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10623 % 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10640 % 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10653 % 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10659 % 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10666 % 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10679 % 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10682 % 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10689 % 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10693 % 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}% 10695 % 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10697 % 10698 % Greek letters upper case 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10716 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10724 % 10725 % Vowels with accents 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10732 % 10733 % Standalone accent 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10735 % 10736 % Greek letters lower case 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10762 % 10763 % More Greek vowels with accents 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10769 % 10770 % Variant Greek letters 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10774 % 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10787 % 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10790 % 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10799 % 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10812 % 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10823 % 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10834 % 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10845 % 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10850 % 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10867 % 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10878 % 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10881 % 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10886 % 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10891 % 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10894 % 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10898 % 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10901 % 10902 % Punctuation 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10905 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10918 % 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10920 % 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10923 % 10924 % Mathematical symbols 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10939 % 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11031 % 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11061 % 11062 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11064}% end of \unicodechardefs 11065 11066% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11067% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11068\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11069 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11070 \unicodechardefs 11071} 11072 11073% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11074% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11075% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11076% printing the correct glyphs. 11077\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11078\passthroughcharsfalse 11079 11080% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11081% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11082% 11083\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11084 \catcode"#1=\active 11085 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11086 \begingroup 11087 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11088 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11089 \ifpassthroughchars 11090 ##1% 11091 \else 11092 ##3% 11093 \fi 11094 } 11095 \endgroup 11096 } 11097 \begingroup 11098 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11099 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11100 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11101 \endgroup 11102} 11103 11104% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11105% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11106\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11107 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11108 \unicodechardefs 11109} 11110 11111% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11112% make the character token expand 11113% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11114\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11115 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11116 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11117} 11118 11119% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11120\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11121 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11122 \unicodechardefs 11123} 11124 11125% US-ASCII character definitions. 11126\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11127 \relax 11128} 11129 11130% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11131% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11132\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11133 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11134\else 11135 \utfeightchardefs 11136\fi 11137 11138\message{formatting,} 11139 11140\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11141 11142\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11143\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11144\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11145 11146% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11147\vbadness = 10000 11148 11149% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11150\hbadness = 6666 11151 11152% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11153\widowpenalty=10000 11154\clubpenalty=10000 11155 11156% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11157% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11158% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11159% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11160% 11161\def\setemergencystretch{% 11162 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11163 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11164 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11165 \else 11166 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11167 \fi 11168} 11169 11170% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11171% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11172% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11173% 11174% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11175% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11176% 11177\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11178 \voffset = #3\relax 11179 \topskip = #6\relax 11180 \splittopskip = \topskip 11181 % 11182 \vsize = #1\relax 11183 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11184 \outervsize = \vsize 11185 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11186 \txipageheight = \vsize 11187 % 11188 \hsize = #2\relax 11189 \outerhsize = \hsize 11190 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11191 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11192 % 11193 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11194 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11195 % 11196 \ifpdf 11197 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11198 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11199 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11200 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11201 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11202 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11203 \else 11204 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11205 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11206 \else 11207 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11208 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11209 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11210 \fi 11211 \fi 11212 % 11213 \setleading{\textleading} 11214 % 11215 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11216 \setemergencystretch 11217} 11218 11219% @letterpaper (the default). 11220\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11221 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11222 \textleading = 13.2pt 11223 % 11224 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11225 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11226 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11227 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11228 {11in}{8.5in}% 11229}} 11230 11231% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11232\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11233 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11234 \textleading = 12pt 11235 % 11236 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11237 {-.2in}{0in}% 11238 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11239 {9.25in}{7in}% 11240 % 11241 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11242 \tolerance = 700 11243 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11244 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11245}} 11246 11247% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11248% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11249\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11250 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11251 \textleading = 12pt 11252 % 11253 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11254 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11255 {0pt}{14pt}% 11256 {9in}{6in}% 11257 % 11258 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11259 \tolerance = 700 11260 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11261 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11262}} 11263 11264% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11265\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11266 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11267 \textleading = 13.2pt 11268 % 11269 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11270 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11271 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11272 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11273 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11274 % your texinfo source file like this: 11275 % @tex 11276 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11277 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11278 % @end tex 11279 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11280 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11281 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11282 {297mm}{210mm}% 11283 % 11284 \tolerance = 700 11285 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11286 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11287}} 11288 11289% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11290% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11291% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11292\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11293 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11294 \textleading = 12.5pt 11295 % 11296 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11297 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11298 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11299 {210mm}{148mm}% 11300 % 11301 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11302 \tolerance = 800 11303 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11304 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11305 \tableindent = 12mm 11306}} 11307 11308% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11309\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11310 \afourpaper 11311 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11312 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11313 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11314 {297mm}{210mm}% 11315 % 11316 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11317 \globaldefs = 0 11318}} 11319 11320% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11321\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11322 \afourpaper 11323 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11324 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11325 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11326 {297mm}{210mm}% 11327 \globaldefs = 0 11328}} 11329 11330\def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11331 \afourpaper 11332 \internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}% 11333 {-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}% 11334 {\bindingoffset}{14pt}% 11335 {176mm}{125mm}% 11336 \let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword 11337 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11338 \globaldefs = 0 11339}} 11340 11341 11342% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11343% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11344% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11345% 11346\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11347\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11348 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11349 \globaldefs = 1 11350 % 11351 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11352 \setleading{\textleading}% 11353 % 11354 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11355 \advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line 11356 % and 1.5in to include heading, footing and 11357 % bottom margin 11358 % 11359 \dimen2 = \hsize 11360 \advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side 11361 % 11362 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11363 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11364 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11365 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11366}} 11367 11368% Set default to letter. 11369% 11370\letterpaper 11371 11372% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11373\hfuzz = 1pt 11374 11375 11376\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11377 11378\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11379 11380% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11381\catcode`\^^? = 14 11382 11383% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11384\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11385\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11386\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11387\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11388\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11389\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11390\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11391\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11392\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11393 11394% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11395% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11396% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11397% 11398% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11399% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11400% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11401% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11402% 11403\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11404 11405% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11406% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11407% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11408% this is not a problem. 11409\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11410 11411% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11412 11413% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11414% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11415% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11416% 11417\catcode`\"=\active 11418\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11419\let"=\activedoublequote 11420\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11421\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11422\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11423 11424\catcode`\_=\active 11425\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11426\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11427\let\realunder=_ 11428 11429\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11430 11431\chardef \less=`\< 11432\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11433\chardef \gtr=`\> 11434\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11435\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11436\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11437\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11438 11439 11440% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11441% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11442\def\texinfochars{% 11443 \let< = \activeless 11444 \let> = \activegtr 11445 \let~ = \activetilde 11446 \let^ = \activehat 11447 \setregularquotes 11448 \let\b = \strong 11449 \let\i = \smartitalic 11450 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11451} 11452 11453% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11454% parsing them. 11455\def\turnoffactive{% 11456 \normalturnoffactive 11457 \otherbackslash 11458} 11459 11460\catcode`\@=0 11461 11462% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11463% as in \char`\\. 11464\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11465 11466% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 11467{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 11468 11469% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11470% in fixed width font. 11471\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11472 11473% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11474% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11475% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11476% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11477% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11478% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11479% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11480% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11481 11482@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11483@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11484 11485% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11486% catcode other. 11487@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11488 11489% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11490% the literal character `\'. 11491% 11492{@catcode`- = @active 11493 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11494 @passthroughcharstrue 11495 @let-=@normaldash 11496 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11497 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11498 @let+=@normalplus 11499 @let<=@normalless 11500 @let>=@normalgreater 11501 @let^=@normalcaret 11502 @let_=@normalunderscore 11503 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11504 @let~=@normaltilde 11505 @let\=@ttbackslash 11506 @setregularquotes 11507 @unsepspaces 11508 } 11509} 11510 11511% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11512% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11513% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11514@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11515 11516% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11517% 11518% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11519% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11520% a backslash. 11521% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11522% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11523% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11524% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11525{ 11526@catcode`@^=7 11527@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11528 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11529 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11530 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11531 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11532 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11533 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11534 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11535 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11536 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11537 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11538}} 11539 11540{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11541@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11542 11543% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11544% appears by mistake. 11545{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11546@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11547 @gdef^^M{% 11548 @par% 11549 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11550}}} 11551 11552 11553@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11554 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11555 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11556 @enableemergencynewline 11557 @let@c=@comment 11558 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11559 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11560 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11561 @catcode`+=@active 11562 @catcode`@_=@active 11563 % 11564 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11565 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11566 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11567 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11568 % file for Texinfo. 11569 % 11570 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11571 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11572 @closein 1 11573} 11574 11575 11576% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11577@escapechar = `@@ 11578 11579% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11580% active definitions as the normal characters. 11581@def@normaldot{.} 11582@def@normalquest{?} 11583@def@normalslash{/} 11584 11585% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11586% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11587@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11588@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11589@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11590 11591@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11592 11593@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11594@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11595@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11596@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11597@catcode`@'=@active 11598@catcode`@`=@active 11599@setregularquotes 11600 11601@c Local variables: 11602@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp) 11603@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11604@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11605@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11606@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11607@c End: 11608 11609@c vim:sw=2: 11610 11611@enablebackslashhack 11612 11613
